0% found this document useful (0 votes)

91 views

Yaskawa Memocon User Manual

This manual describes specifications, connections, and precautions for 120-series I/O Modules used with MEMOCON GL120, GL130 Programmable Controllers. It provides details on digital and analog input and output modules, including specifications, wiring, allocation, and operations using MEMOSOFT software.

Uploaded by

Mahesh Nanayakkara

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

91 views

Yaskawa Memocon User Manual

Uploaded by

Mahesh Nanayakkara

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 308

MEMOCON GL120, GL130

120-SERIES I/O MODULES

USER'S MANUAL

MANUAL NO. SIE-C825-20.22C

Manual Contents
This manual describes specifications, connections, and precautions for 120-series
I/O Modules. The 120-series I/O Modules are used with the MEMOCON GL120,
GL130 Programmable Controllers (PLCs).
Read this manual carefully and be sure to understand the information provided
before attempting to install or use 120-series I/O Modules.
Also, keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be used whenever necessary.

Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier refer-
ence.

Indicates references for additional information.

IMPORTANT Indicates important information that should be memorized.

EXAMPLE Indicates application examples.

INFO Indicates supplemental information.

SUMMARY Indicates a summary of the important points of explanations.

Note Indicates inputs, operations, and other information required for correct operation
but that will not cause damage to the device.

TERMS Indicates definitions of terms used in the manual.

Notice
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to
heed precautions provided in this manual can result in injury to people or damage to
the products.

WARNING Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or seri-
ous injury.

CAUTION Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.

© Yaskawa, 1998
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed
with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this
manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is
any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.

iii
CONTENTS
Manual Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii
Visual Aids- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii
Notice - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii

1 Introduction and Precautions

1.1 Overview of Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2 Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2.1 Safety Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-3
1.2.2 Installation Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-4
1.2.3 Removal Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-5
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-6
1.2.5 Application Precautions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.2.6 Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14

1.3 Using This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15

2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules

2.1 General Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.2 I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.2.1 Models of I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-3
2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-5
2.2.3 Using I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10

3 Digital I/O Specifications

3.1 Digital Input Module specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-2
3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-6
3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18

3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24

3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55

3.3 I/O Module Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60

3.3.1 I/O Module Cable Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.3.3 W0302 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74

v
3.4 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
3.4.1 16-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
3.4.2 32-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
3.4.3 64-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
3.4.4 8-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92
3.4.5 16-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94
3.4.6 32-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
3.4.7 64-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101

3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106

3.5.1 MEMOSOFT Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - 3-106
3.5.2 Digital Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-107
3.5.3 Digital Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-108
3.5.4 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-109

4 Analog I/O Specifications

4.1 Analog Input Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14

4.2 Analog Output Specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20

4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels) 4-25
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30

4.3 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35

4.3.1 Analog Input Modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35
4.3.2 Analog Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39

4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-41

4.4.1 Analog Input Module I/O Allocation Screen- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-41
4.4.2 Analog Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-42
4.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-43

5 Register I/O Specifications

5.1 Register Input Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.1.1 Register Input Modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

5.2 Register Output Specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

5.2.1 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

5.3 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10

5.3.1 Register Input Modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.3.2 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13

5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17

5.4.1 Register Input Module I/O Allocation Screen- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17
5.4.2 Register Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20

vi
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1 Installing Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1 Module Installation Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-2
6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-4
6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10

6.2 Panel Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13

6.2.1 Separation of Power Supply Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6.2.4 Wiring Analog I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25
6.2.5 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28

6.3 External Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.3.1 External Wiring for Digital I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.4 Precautions on Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32

6.4.1 AC Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
6.4.2 AC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
6.4.3 DC Input Modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
6.4.4 DC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
6.4.5 Connections between AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-49
6.4.6 Connections between DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.7 Analog Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.8 Analog Output Modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
6.4.9 External Power Supplies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52

7 Maintenance
7.1 Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 I/O Modules with Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-2
7.1.2 Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-3
7.1.3 Replacement of Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-5

7.2 Hot Swapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6

7.2.1 Hot Swapping- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-6

8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules

8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.1.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-2
8.1.2 External Appearances- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-3
8.1.3 EN Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-5
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-7

Appendix A External Dimensions

A.1 I/O Module Types- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
A.2 I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-3
A.3 DC 32-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-3
A.4 DC 64-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-4
A.5 Register I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-4

INDEX
vii
Introduction and Precautions

1
1

This chapter introduces the features of 120-series I/O Modules and pro-
vides precautions for the use of this manual and the product.
Read this chapter before attempting to read the rest of the manual or use
the product.

1.1 Overview of Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

1.2 Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2.1 Safety Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2.2 Installation Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.2.3 Removal Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.2.5 Application Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.2.6 Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14

1.3 Using This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15

1-1
1 Introduction and Precautions

1.1 Overview of Manual

• This manual describes the functional specifications of the 120-series I/O Mod-
ules used for the MEMOCON GL120 and GL130 Programmable Controllers.
Read this manual carefully in order to use the 120-series I/O Modules properly.
Also, keep this manual in a safe place so that it can be used whenever neces-
sary.

• Refer to the following manuals for related Peripheral Devices and Modules.

Product Manual Name Manual No. Contents

CPU Module MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-20.1 Gives information on the GL120 and GL130 hard-
Hardware User’s Manual ware, including explanations on the following items.
1) System configuration
2) System components
3) Function and specifications of system compo-
nents
4) Installation and wiring
5) Examples of panel-layout and hole dimensions
6) External Dimensions
MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-20.11 Describes the following items for the GL120 and
Software User’s Manual Vol. 1 GL130.
1) Operating principles
2) I/O allocation
3) Overview of instructions
4) Instruction processing times
MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-20.12 Describes the programming instructions used to
Software User’s Manual Vol.2 create ladder programs for the GL120 and GL130.
The following items are explained in other manuals.
1) Expansion Math instructions
2) Process control instructions
3) Communications instructions
4) Motions control instructions (ladder motion
instructions)
5) Motion language
Human- MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-60.7 Describes the functions, specifications, and opera-
Machine MEMOSOFT for P120 tional methods of the Programming Panel P120 with
Interface Programming Panel built-in MEMOSOFT.
User’s Manual
MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-60.10 Describes the functions and operational methods of
MEMOSOFT MEMOSOFT for DOS.
User’s Manual
MEMOCON GL120, GL130 SIEZ-C825-60.25 Describes the functions and operational methods of
MEMOSOFT for Windows MEMOSOFT for Windows.
User’s Manual

• Thoroughly check the specifications and conditions or restrictions of the product

before use.

1-2
1.2 Precautions

1.2 Precautions

This section outlines general precautions that apply to using this manual and the
product. Read this section first before reading the remainder of the manual.

1.2.1 Safety Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3

1.2.2 Installation Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.2.3 Removal Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6 1
1.2.5 Application Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.2.6 Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14

1.2.1 Safety Precautions

• The GL120 and GL130 were not designed or manufactured for use in devices or
systems directly related to human life. Users who intend to use the product
described in this manual for special purposes such as devices or systems relat-
ing to transportation, medical, space aviation, atomic power control, or under-
water use must contact Yaskawa Electric Corporation beforehand.

• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control guidelines. How-
ever, if this product is to be installed in any location in which a failure of GL120
and GL130 involves a life and death situation or in a facility where failure may
cause a serious accident, safety devices MUST be installed to minimize the like-
lihood of any accident.

• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as

examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applica-
ble.

• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and pre-
sentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product
and/or the manual. A new version of the manual will be released under a revised
manual number when any changes are made.

• Contact your Yaskawa representative or a Yaskawa office listed on the back of

this manual to order a new manual whenever this manual is damaged or lost.
Please provide the manual number listed on the front cover or this manual when
ordering.

• Contact your Yaskawa representative or a Yaskawa office listed on the back of

this manual to order new nameplates whenever a nameplate becomes worn or
damaged.

• Yaskawa cannot guarantee the quality of any products that have been modified.
Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for any injury or damage caused by a modi-
fied product.

1-3
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.2 Installation Precautions

1.2.2 Installation Precautions

Abide by the following precautions when installing MEMOCON systems.

CAUTION • The installation environment must meet the environmental conditions given in prod-
uct catalogs and manuals. Using the GL120 and GL130 in environments subject to
high temperatures, high humidity, excessive dust, corrosive gases, vibration, or
shock can lead to electrical shock, fire, or faulty operation. Do not use the GL120
and GL130 in the following locations.

• Locations subject to direct sunlight or ambient temperatures not between 0 °C

and 60 °C.
• Locations subject to relative humidity in excess of 95%, or condensation
because of rapid changes in humidity.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gas.
• Locations that would subject the GL120 and GL130 to direct vibration or
shock.
• Locations subject to contact with water, oil, chemicals, and so on.

CAUTION • Install Modules as described in the user’s manuals.

Faulty or inappropriate installation may result in detachment or malfunction.

CAUTION • Do not remove the connector covers from the Module connectors on the Mounting
Base slots where no Modules are installed.

The presence of any foreign matter in a Module connector may cause the
GL120 and GL130 to malfunction.

CAUTION • Make sure that all mounting screws for the Modules are securely tightened.

Loose screws may cause malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

CAUTION • Make sure that all mounting screws for the terminal block are securely tightened.

Loose screws may cause a malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

CAUTION • When installing the terminal block for the AC I/O Modules, turn OFF the AC power
supply to the I/O Modules for inputting signals and for driving load.

Installing a terminal block with the AC power being supplied to the terminal of
the external power supply for the AC I/O Modules may cause an electric shock if
the power supply terminals are touched.

• When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving loads of the
CAUTION
Relay Contact Output Module, turn OFF the AC power to the Modules for driving
loads before installing the terminal block for the Modules.

Installing a terminal block with the AC power being supplied to the external
power supply terminal of the Relay Contact Output Module may cause an elec-
tric shock if the power supply terminals are touched.

CAUTION • Make sure that all cable connectors for the Module are securely inserted and tight-
ened.

Incorrect connections may cause malfunction of the GL120 or GL130.

1-4
1.2 Precautions

1.2.3 Removal Precautions

CAUTION • Always turn OFF the AC power supply to the AC I/O Modules that are used for
inputting signals and driving loads before removing the terminal block from the AC I/
O Modules.

Removing a terminal block with AC power to the external power supply terminal
of the AC I/O Modules may cause an electric shock at touching the power sup-
ply terminals.
1
CAUTION • When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving loads of the
Relay Contact Output Module, turn OFF the AC power to the Modules for driving
loads before removing the terminal block for the Modules.

Removing a terminal block with the AC power being supplied to the external
power supply terminal of the Relay Contact Output Module may cause an elec-
tric shock if the power supply terminals are touched.

CAUTION • When inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while the AC power supply is turned
ON, install a safety switch for each Module and always turn this safety switch OFF
to turn OFF the AC power supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while AC power is being supplied may

result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

CAUTION • When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving the loads of
the Relay Contact Output Module, install a safety switch for each Module. Before
inserting or removing the Relay Contact Output Module, always turn this safety
switch OFF to turn OFF the AC power supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing a Relay Contact Output Module while AC power is being

supplied may result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

1-5
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions

1.2.4 Wiring Precautions

CAUTION • Wiring must be performed by qualified personnel.

Wrong or inappropriate wiring may result in fire, product failure, or electric

shock.

CAUTION • Connect the correct power supply for the required ratings.

Connecting unsuitable power supplies may result in fires.

CAUTION • Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.

Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures and/
or malfunctions.

CAUTION • Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

CAUTION • If using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving the loads of the
Relay Contact Output Module, connect power supplies with the same phases to the
common 1 and common 2 of the Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

CAUTION • If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications
in series with the load.

A protective fuse is not built into the following Output Modules. If a fuse is not
connected, a fire or damage to the device or output circuits may occur if the load
is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

• 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO083000

• Relay contact 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84300

CAUTION • If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications
in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following Output Modules does not protect the
output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or damage to the device or out-
put circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

• 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300

• 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDO33000
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO34310
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO34320
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO35410
• 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO36410

1-6
1.2 Precautions

• Connect an AC power supply (100/200 VAC) or a DC power supply (12/24 VDC) to

CAUTION the Power Supply for driving loads of the Relay Contact Output Module.

Do not connect both an AC power supply and a DC power supply to one Module
at the same time. If unsuitable power supplies are connected, in overheating or
fire may result.

CAUTION • Although a 0.6-A load can be connected to each output point for the AC 16-point
Output Module, the total load must be 2.4A or less for each common. Keep the
maximum load at 2.4A for each common. 1
If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION • Although a 0.5-A load can be connected to each output point for the DC 16-point
Output Module, the total load must be 1.0 A or less for each of the four output
points. Keep the load distribution within the 1.0 A limit.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION • Although a 0.3-A load can be connected to each output point of the DC 32-point
Output Module, the total load must be 0.4 A or less for each of the four output
points. Keep the load distribution within the 0.4 A limit.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION • If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications
in series with the load.

• 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO83000

• 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sinking output):
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO33000
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sourcing output):
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO34320
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (sinking output):
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO35410
• 12/24 VDC 64-point Output Module (sinking output):
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO36410
• Relay Contact 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300
If a fuse is not connected, a fire or damage to the device or output circuit may
occur if the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

CAUTION • If connecting an inductive load in parallel with AC Input Module, connect the surge
absorber in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a surge absorber may result in damage to the AC Input Mod-
ule.

CAUTION • If connecting an inductive load to the AC Output Module, connect the surge
absorber in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a surge absorber may result in damage to the AC Output

Module.

1-7
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions

• If connecting an inductive load in parallel with DC Input Module, connect the fly-
CAUTION wheel diode in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Input Mod-
ule.

CAUTION • If connecting an inductive load to the DC Output Module, connect the flywheel
diode in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Output

Module.

CAUTION • If connecting a contact to an inductive load of the DC Output Module, connect the
flywheel diode in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Output

Module.

CAUTION • Insulation is not provided between the channels of the Analog Input Module.
To insulate all the analog signals connected to the Analog Input Module, use a com-
mercial isolation amplifier for each channel.

Incorrect connections may cause damages and malfunctions of the Analog

Input Modules.

CAUTION • The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (±10V, 2 chan-
nels) is ±5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result in
damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION • The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (0 to10V, 2 chan-
nels) is 5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result in
damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION • The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (0 to 5V, 2 chan-
nels) is 2.5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result in
damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION • The maximum allowable load resistance for Analog Output Modules (4 mA to 20
mA, 2 channels) is 550 kΩ). The load resistance must be 550 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result in
damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION • If using Low Voltage Directive compliant products, always use round crimp termi-
nals for M3 screws and mount insulation cover at each crimp when connecting
wires to wiring terminals.

If bare wires are used, an electric shock or a short-circuit may result if the wires
become loose.

1-8
1.2 Precautions

• Ground the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire that connects to the Analog I/O
CAUTION Module to one point (a resistance of 100 Ω max.).

Not grounding the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire may result in malfunc-
tion of the GL120 and GL130.

CAUTION • Ground the ground terminal of the Analog Input Module to a resistance of 100 Ω
max.

Not grounding the ground terminal may result in malfunction of the GL120 and 1
GL130.

Power Supply Noise Reduction

• Prevent noise from penetrating into the product by installing an isolation trans-
former or a noise filter for the external power supply.
Noise from power supply may result in malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

• Do not install the GL120 and GL130 system components in the same control
panel as high-voltage or high-current circuits.
Here, high-voltage circuits are those with voltages of 600 VAC or 750 VDC
min. and high-current circuits are those with amperages of 800 A min.

• When installing the GL120 and GL130 system components in the same control
panel as low-voltage main circuits, separate the low-voltage circuits and related
devices as far as possible from the GL120 and GL130 system components and
wiring.
The recommended separation is 200 mm min. Here. low-voltage main circuits
are those with voltages up to 600 VAC or 750 VDC and amperages of 20 A
min.

• Do not bundle GL120 and GL130 wiring together with wiring for normal control
circuits.
Here, normal control circuits are those with voltages up to 600 VAC or 750
VDC and amperages up to 20 A.

Insert the Interface Cables Properly

• Insert the connectors of the various interface cables that are to be connected to
the GL120 and GL130 into the communication ports and secure them properly.
Improper insertion of interface cables may cause operational errors in the
GL120 and GL130.

1-9
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.4 Wiring Precautions

Select, Separate, and Lay External Wiring Correctly

• I/O lines connecting external devices to the 120-series I/O Modules must be
selected based on the following considerations: mechanical strength, resistance
to noise, wiring distance, signal voltage, and so on.
• I/O lines must be separated from power lines both inside and outside the control
panel to minimize the affects of noise. Faulty operation may result if I/O lines are
not sufficiently separated from power lines.
Steel-plate separator
Example of external wiring separation

Power lines General control Digital I/O Analog I/O Pulse input
circuit cables signal cables signal cables signal cables

1-10
1.2 Precautions

1.2.5 Application Precautions

WARNING • Do not touch the Module terminals while the power is ON.
Touching live terminals may cause electric shock.

WARNING • Construct an emergency stop circuit and an interlock circuit outside of the GL120
and GL130.

The absence of emergency stop and interlock circuits may result in machine 1
damage or accidents should the GL120 or GL130 fail.

Install an Emergency Stop Circuit Outside the GL120 and GL130.

WARNING An emergency stop circuit for the control system should not be constructed
using the ladder programming in the GL120 and GL130. Always construct the
emergency stop circuit externally using a relay circuit, as shown in the figure
below.

Use an N.C. contact (mechanical contact) in the emergency stop switch. The
main power supply to the servo must be cut off by pressing the switch.

Failure to provide an emergency stop circuit as described above, may result in

failure of the emergency stop when input circuits fail or cables break, and may
cause machine damage or injury.

Control power
Control power supply ON MC1
supply OFF

MC1 Z

Emergency stop
MC1 Servo OFF Servo ON MC2

ESP-TBOX ALM MC2 Z

Surge absorber
Noise filter
MEMOCON GL120, GL130
MC1 Noise filter

r SERVOPACK
Control signal to MC Module
t
MC2
r Encoder
s
U
t
V Servomotor
W

1-11
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.5 Application Precautions

External Interlocks for the GL120 and GL130

WARNING Externally connect an interlock to the GL120 and GL130 if there is any chance
that GL120 and GL130 failure could result in bodily harm or equipment damage.

Always use an external interlock system as shown in the following example

when reciprocal operations (e.g., forward and reverse directions) are being per-
formed with a motor.

An interlock is generally programmed in the GL120 and GL130 ladder program

to ensure that forward and reverse signals are not simultaneously output. An
external interlock circuit must also be provided using the auxiliary contacts of
electromagnetic contactors.
CPU Module Output Module

Ladder logic program R F OL

Output program with
Contact of over-
an interlock which
current protection
prohibit simultaneous
forward and reverse F R device.
runs

Electric interlock using the auxiliary contacts

of electromagnetic contactors

F (Forward run)
Induction motor

R (Reverse run)

Inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while AC power is being supplied may

result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

Inserting or removing a Relay Contact Output Module while AC power is being

supplied may result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

1-12
1.2 Precautions

• The following CPU Modules, Remote I/O Receiver Modules, and MEMOSOFT ver-
CAUTION sions are required to use DC 64-point I/O Modules.

Using a version that is not recommended may result in failure or malfunction.

Name Model Model No. Version Number Location of

Name Version Number
CPU Module CPU10 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(8 kW) 120CPU14200
CPU Module CPU20 DDSCR- B05 and later Module nameplate 1
(16 kW) 120CPU34100
CPU Module CPU21 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(16 kW) 120CPU34110
CPU Module CPU30 DDSCR- B05 and later Module nameplate
(32 kW) 120CPU54100
CPU Module CPU35 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(40 kW) 120CPU154110
Remote I/O RIOR- JAMSC- A10 and later Module nameplate
Receiver COAX 120CRR13100
Module
MEMOSOFT FMSGL-AT3 1.21 and later In the middle at the
(for English bottom of the
DOS) MEMOSOFT
startup screen.
FMSGL-PP3E
(for P120
English version)

* The nameplate is on the right side of the Module.

1-13
1 Introduction and Precautions
1.2.6 Maintenance

1.2.6 Maintenance

CAUTION • Do not disassemble or modify Modules and Mounting Bases.

Failure to observe this caution may result in fire, product failure, or malfunction.

CAUTION • Do not replace the built-in fuses of the AC 16-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or a malfunction may occur in the AC 16-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

CAUTION • Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 8-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 8-point Output Modules,
and the guarantee is void.

CAUTION • Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 32-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 32-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

CAUTION • Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 64-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 64-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

CAUTION • Do not replace the built-in fuses of the Register I/O Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the Register I/O Modules, and
the guarantee is void.

1-14
1.3 Using This Manual

1.3 Using This Manual

This manual is written for those who already have a basic knowledge of MEMOCON
PLCs. We recommended reading the MEMOCON GL120, GL130 Hardware User’s
Manual (manual No. SIEZ-C825-20.1) before attempting to read this manual.

• Meaning of Basic Terms

In this manual, the following terms indicate the meanings as described below,
unless otherwise specified.
1
Terms Meaning Remarks
PLC Programmable (Logic) Controller Does not mean “personal
computer.”
PP Programming Panel −
GL120, GL130 MEMOCON GL120 and MEMOCON GL130 −
Programmable Controllers
AC I/O AC input 100-VAC 16-point Input Module −
Module Module 200-VAC 16-point Input Module
AC output 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module *1 When the AC load is
Module 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module applied.
Relay Contact 16-point Output Module*1
DC I/O DC input 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module −
Module Module 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module
12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module
DC output 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module *2 When the DC load is
Module 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module applied.
12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module
12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module
Relay contact 16-point Output Module*2
Analog Analog Analog Input Module (±10V, 4CH) −
I/O input Module Analog Input Module (0 to 10V, 4CH)
Module Analog Input Module (4 to 20mA, 4CH)
Analog Analog Output Module (±10V, 2CH) −
output Module Analog Output Module (0 to 10V, 2CH)
Analog Output Module (0 to 5V, 2CH)
Analog Output Module (4 to 20mA, 2CH)
Register I/O Module Register Input Module −
Register Output Module

• Description of Technical Terms

The bold technical terms in this manual are briefly explained in the Glossary
provided at the bottom of the page. An example is shown below.

Glossary
TERMS
The following types of terms are described.
• Specific sequence control terms required for explanation of functions.
• Terms that are specific to programmable controllers and electronic devices.

1-15
Models and General Specifications
of I/O Modules

2
2
This chapter describes the models and general specifications of I/O
Modules.

2.1 General Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

2.2 I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.2.1 Models of I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
2.2.3 Using I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10

2-1
2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules

2.1 General Specifications

This section gives the general specifications of I/O Modules.

Table 2.1 General Specifications

Item Specification
Environmental Ambient Operating Temperature 0 °C to 60 °C
Conditions Ambient Storage Temperature -25 C° to 85 °C (excluding battery)
Ambient Operating Humidity 30 % to 95 % RH (with no condensation)
Ambient Storage Humidity 5 % to 95 % RH (with no condensation)
Pollution Level Pollution level 1 (according to JIS B3502)
Corrosive Gas No corrosive gas
Operating Altitude Less than 2,000 m above sea level
Mechanical Vibration Shock 10 to 57 Hz with half-amplitude of 0.075mm
Operating 57 to 150 Hz with fixed acceleration of 9.8 m/s2
Conditions
10 sweep times each in X, Y, and Z directions
(sweep time: 1 octave/min) (according to JIS B3502)
Shock Resistance Peak acceleration of 147 m/s2 twice for 11 ms in X, Y,
and Z directions (according to JIS B3502)
Electrical Noise Resistance 1,500 V in either normal or common mode with pulse
Operating widths of 100 ns and 1 µs and rise time of 1 ns (with
Conditions impulse noise simulator) (according to JIS B3502)
Installation Ground Ground to 100 Ω or less
Requirements Configuration Building-block, wall-mounted, or DIN track mounted
Cooling Method Natural cooling
Mass See specifications for individual I/O Modules.
External Dimensions See specifications for individual I/O Modules.

2-2
2.2 I/O Modules

2.2 I/O Modules

This section describes various input modules and output modules.

2.2.1 Models of I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-3

2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-5
2.2.3 Using I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10

2.2.1 Models of I/O Modules

Twenty models of I/O Modules are available.

2
Table 2.2 I/O Modules

Product Name Model Name Model No. Features Number

of slots
required
Digital 100-VAC AC100IN-16P JAMSC- 1) Used to input digital signals. 1
Input 16-point Input 120DAI54300 2) 100VAC, 16 points, 7mA (50Hz)
Modules Module
200-VAC AC200IN-16P JAMSC- 1) Used to input digital signals. 1
16-point Input 120DAI74300 2) 200VAC, 16 points, 7mA (50Hz)
Module
12/24-VDC DC24IN-16P JAMSC- 1) Used to input digital signals. 1
16-point Input 120DDI34300 2) 12/24VDC, 16 points, 4mA (12VDC), 8mA
Module (24VDC)
12/24-VDC DC24IN-32P JAMSC- 1) Used to input digital signals. 1
32-point Input 120DDI35400 2) 12/24VDC, 32 points, 2mA (12VDC), 4mA
Module (24VDC)
12/24-VDC DC24IN-64P JAMSC- 1) Used to input digital signals. 1
64-point Input 120DDI36400 2) 12/24VDC, 64 points, 2mA (12VDC), 4mA
Module (24VDC)
Analog Analog Input A/D-VOL- JAMSC- 1) Used to input analog signals. 1
Input Module (±10V, 4CH 120AVI02000 2) -10 to 10V, 4 channels
Modules 4 channels)
Analog Input A/D 0-10V JAMSC- 1) Used to input analog signals. 1
Module (0 to 4CH 120AVI02100 2) 0 to 10V, 4 channels
10V, 4 chan-
nels)
Analog Input A/D-CUR- JAMSC- 1) Used to input analog signals. 1
Module (4 to 4CH 120ACI02000 2) 4 to 20mA/1 to 5V, 4 channels
20mA, 4 chan-
nels)
Digital 100/200-VAC ACOUT-8P JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
Output 8-point 120DAO83000 2) 100/200VAC, 8 points, 1.0 A/point
Modules Output Module
100/200-VAC ACOUT-16P JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
16-point 120DAO84300 2) 100/200VAC, 16 points, 0.3 A/point
Output Module
12/24-VDC 8- DC24OUT-8P JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
point Output 120DDO33000 2) 12/24VDC, 8 points, sourcing/sinking
Module outputs, 2.0 A/point
12/24-VDC DC24OUT- JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
16-point Out- 16PSN 120DDO34310 2) 12/24VDC, 16 points, sinking outputs, 0.5
put Module A/point, 1.0 A/4points
(sinking)

2-3
2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules
2.2.1 Models of I/O Modules

Table 2.2 I/O Modules

Product Name Model Name Model No. Features Number

of slots
required
Digital 12/24-VDC DC24OUT- JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
Output 16-point Out- 16PSR 120DDO34320 2) 12/24VDC, 16 points, sourcing outputs,
Modules put Module 0.5 A/point, 1.0 A/4points
(sourcing)
12/24-VDC DC24OUT- JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
32-point Out- 32PSN 120DDO35410 2) 12/24VDC, 32 points, sinking outputs, 0.3
put Module A/point, 0.4 A/4points
(sinking)
12/24-VDC DC24OUT- JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
64-point Out- 64PSN 120DDO36410 2) 12/24VDC, 64 points, sinking outputs, 0.1
put Module A/point
(sinking)
Relay Contact RELAY-16P JAMSC- 1) Used to output digital signals. 1
16-point Out- 120DRA84300 2) Relay contacts, 16 points, 1.0 A/point
put Module
Analog Analog Out- D/A-VOL-2CH JAMSC- 1) Used to output analog signals. 1
Output put Module 120AVO01000 2) -10 to 10V, 2 channels
Modules (±10V, 2 chan-
nels)
Analog Out- D/A 0-10V 2CH JAMSC- 1) Used to output analog signals. 1
put Module 120AVO01100 2) 0 to 10V, 2 channels
(0 to 10V, 2
channels)
Analog Out- D/A 0-5V 2CH JAMSC- 1) Used to output analog signals. 1
put Module 120AVO01200 2) 0 to 5V, 2 channels
(0 to 5V, 2
channels)
Analog Out- D/A-CUR- 2CH JAMSC- 1) Used to output analog signals. 1
put Module 120ACO01000 2) 4 to 20mA, 2 channels
(4 to 20mA, 2
channels)
Special Register Input REGISTER-IN JAMSC- 1) Used to input a maximum of 8 sets (8 1
Purpose Module 120RDI34410 channel) or 16 sets (16 channel) of 16-bit
Modules or BCD 4-digit values.
2) The data input cycle can be selected:
For 8 channels: 10/32/64/192/320 ms
For 16 channels: 20/64/128/384/640 ms
Register Out- REGISTER- JAMSC- 1) Used to output a maximum of 8 sets (8 1
put Module OUT 120RDO34410 channel) or 16 sets (16 channel) of 16-bit
or BCD 4-digit values.
2) Select the data output cycle.
For 8-channel: 32/64/192/320 ms
For 16-channel: 64/128/640 ms
Note: The 64-point I/O Modules are limited to versions for the CPU Module, remote I/O
Receiver Module and MEMOSOFT. Refer to 2.2.3 Using I/O Modules for details.

2-4
2.2 I/O Modules

2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications

1) Digital Input Modules

a) Function
A Digital Input Module converts the digital signals coming from pushbutton switches,
limit switches, and digital switches into signals of appropriate voltage for PLC inter-
nal processing. The converted digital signals are stored by the CPU Module as input
relays and input registers in state memory.

b) Specifications
The following table shows the main specifications of Digital Input Modules. 2
Table 2.3 Main Specifications of Digital Input Modules

Name Model Model No. Rated Rated Input Input Num- Internal Maxi- Hot
Name Volt- Current Imped- Delay ber of Current Con- mum Swap-
age ance Times inputs sumption Heat- ping
ing
Value
100-VAC AC100IN- JAMSC- 100 7 mA 14.3 kΩ OFF→ON: 16 With all points 2.0 W Per-
16-point 16P 120DAI54 VAC (50Hz) (50 Hz) Max. 20 ms ON: 90 mA mitted
Input 300 12.5 kΩ ON→OFF:
Module (60 Hz) Max. 35 ms
200-VAC AC200IN- JAMSC- 200 7 mA 28.6 kΩ OFF→ON: 16 With all points 3.5 W Per-
16-point 16P 120DAI74 VAC (50Hz) (50 Hz) Max. 20 ms ON: 90 mA mitted
Input 300 23.1 kΩ ON→OFF:
Module (60 Hz) Max. 35 ms
12/24- DC24IN- JAMSC- 12/24 4 mA 3.0 kΩ OFF→ON: 16 With all points 3.7 W Per-
VDC 16- 16P 120DDI34 VDC (12 VDC) Max. 5 ms ON: 100 mA mitted
point Input 300 8 mA ON→OFF:
Module (24 VDC) Max. 5 ms
12/24- DC24IN- JAMSC- 12/24 2 mA 5.6 kΩ OFF→ON: 32 With all points 3.6 W Per-
VDC 32- 32P 120DDI35 VDC (12 VDC) Max. 5 ms ON: 80 mA mitted
point Input 400 4 mA ON→OFF:
Module (24 VDC) Max. 5 ms
12/24- DC24IN- JAMSC- 12/24 2 mA 5.6 kΩ OFF→ON: 64 With all points 7.0 W Per-
VDC 64- 64P 120DDI36 VDC (12 VDC) Max. 5 ms ON: 100 mA mitted
point Input 400 4 mA ON→OFF:
Module (24 VDC) Max. 5 ms
Other Specifications
1) Slots required: 1
2) Width: 40.3 mm Height: 130 mm Depth: 103.9 mm
3) Approx. mass
16-point Input Module: 250 g
32-point Input Module: 250 g
64-point Input Module: 300 g
4) Field connections
16-point Input Module: terminal block
32-point Input Module: connector
64-point Input Module: connector
5) Number of points per common
16-point Input Module: 8 points per common
32-point Input Module: 16 points per common
64-point Input Module: 16 points per common

2-5
2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules
2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications

2) Analog Input Modules

a) Function
An Analog Input Module converts the analog signals coming from weight sensors,
temperature sensors, etc., into numeric data appropriate for PLC internal process-
ing. The converted numeric data is stored by the CPU Module as the input registers
in state memory.

b) Specifications
The following table shows the main specifications of the Analog Input Modules.

Table 2.4 Main Specifications of Analog Input Modules

Name Model Model Input Overall Resolution Input Num- Internal Maxi- Hot
Name No. Signal Accuracy and Data Impedance ber of Current mum Swap-
Range Types Chan- Con- Heat- ping
nels sump- ing
tion
Value
Analog A/D- JAMSC- -10 to ±0.5% F.S. 0 to 4000 1 MΩ min. 4 450 2.3 W Per-
Input VOL- 120AVI +10 V (25°C) mode: 12 bits, mA mitted
Module 4CH 02000 binary between
(±10 V, 4 0 and 4000
channels) ±1.0% F.S. ± 2000 mode:
(0 to 60°C) 12 bits, 2’s
complement
between -2000
and +2000
Analog A/D JAMSC- 0 to ±0.5% F.S. 12 bits, binary 1 MΩ min. 4 450 2.3 W Per-
Input 0-10V 120AVI +10 V (25°C) between 0 and mA mitted
Module 4CH 02100 ±1.0% F.S. 4000
(0 to (0 to 60°C)
10 V,
4 chan-
nels)
Analog A/D- JAMSC- Current ±0.5% F.S. 12 bits, binary Current 4 450 2.3 W Per-
Input CUR- 120ACI input: (25 °C) between 0 and input: 250 Ω mA mitted
Module (4 4CH 02000 4 to 20 ±1.0% F.S. 4000 voltage
to 20 mA, mA (0 to 60°C) input: 1 MΩ
4 chan- Voltage min.
nels) input:
1 to 5 V
Other Specifications
1) Slots required: 1
2) Approx. mass: 300 g
3) Width: 40.3 mm Height: 130 mm Depth: 103.9 mm
4) Field connections: Terminal block

2-6
2.2 I/O Modules

3) Digital Output Modules

a) Function
A Digital Output Module converts the numeric data stored in output registers or the
ON/OFF state of the output coil in the state memory of the CPU Module into digital
signals for control of indicators, electromagnetic switches, relays, solenoid valves,
numeric indicators, etc.

b) Specifications
The following table shows the main specifications of Digital Output Modules.

Table 2.5 Main Specifications of Digital Output Modules 2

Name Model Model No. Rated Load Remarks Output Num Internal Maxi- Hot
Name Volt- Current Delay ber Current Con- mum Swap
age Times of sumption Heat- ping
Out- ing
puts Value
100/200- ACOUT JAMSC- 100/ 1.0 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 8 With all 9.0 W Per-
VAC -8P 120DAO83 200 point tected Max. 5 ms points ON: mit-
8-point 000 VAC outputs ON→OFF: 150 mA ted
Output 1/2 cycle +
Module 5 ms max.
100/200- ACOUT JAMSC- 100/ 0.6 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 16 With all 5.5 W Per-
VAC -16P 120DAO84 200 point tected Max. 5 ms points ON: mit-
16-point 300 VAC outputs ON→OFF: 300 mA ted
Output 1/2 cycle +
Module 5 ms max.
12/24-VDC DC24O JAMSC- 12/24 2.0 A/ Short-cir- OFF→ON: 8 With all 1.6 W Per-
8-point UT-8P 120DDO33 VDC point cuit pro- Max. 3 ms points ON: mit-
Output 000 tection ON→OFF: 220 mA ted
Module Sourcing/ Max. 5 ms
sinking
outputs
12/24-VDC DC24O JAMSC- 12/24 0.5 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 16 With all 7.1 W Per-
16-point UT- 120DDO34 VDC point, tected Max. 1 ms points ON: mit-
Output 16PSN 310 1.0 A/ outputs ON→OFF: 220 mA ted
Module 4 points Sinking Max. 1 ms
(sinking) outputs
12/24-VDC DC24O JAMSC- 12/24 0.5 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 16 With all 7.5 W Per-
16-point UT- 120DDO34 VDC point, tected Max. 1 ms points ON: mit-
Output 16PSR 320 1.0 A/ outputs ON→OFF: 300 mA ted
Module 4 points Sourcing Max. 1 ms
(sourcing) outputs
12/24-VDC DC24O JAMSC- 12/24 0.3 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 32 With all 6.5 W Per-
32-point UT- 120DDO35 VDC point, tected Max. 1 ms points ON: mit-
Output 32PSN 410 0.4 A/ outputs ON→OFF: 330 mA ted
Module 4 points Sinking Max. 1 ms
(sinking) outputs
12/24-VDC DC24O JAMSC- 12/24 0.1 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 64 With all 13.0 W Per-
64-point UT- 120DDO36 VDC point tected Max. 1 ms points ON: mit-
Output 64PSN 410 output ON→OFF: 650 mA ted
Module Sinking Max. 1 ms
(sinking) outputs
Relay con- RELAY- JAMSC- Relay 1.0 A/ Unpro- OFF→ON: 16 With all 3.1 W Per-
tact 16P 120DRA84 contact point tected Max. 10 ms points ON: mit-
16-point 300 outputs ON→OFF: 610 mA ted
Output Max. 15 ms
Module

2-7
2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules
2.2.2 Overview of I/O Module Specifications

Table 2.5 Main Specifications of Digital Output Modules

Name Model Model No. Rated Load Remarks Output Num Internal Maxi- Hot
Name Volt- Current Delay ber Current Con- mum Swap
age Times of sumption Heat- ping
Out- ing
puts Value
Other Specifications
1) Slots required: 1
2) Width: 40.3 mm Height: 130 mm Depth: 103.9 mm
3) Approx. mass
AC Output Module: 300 g
DC Output Module (8-point, 16-point, 32-point): 250 g
DC Output Module (64-point): 300 g
Relay Contact Output Module: 300 g
4) Field connections
8-point Output Module: terminal block
16-point Output Module: terminal block
32-point Output Module: connector
64-point Output Module: connector
Relay Contact Output Module: terminal block
5) Number of points per common
8-point Output Module: Independent outputs
16-point Output Module: 8 points per common
32-point Output Module: 16 points per common
64-point Output Module: 16 points per common
Relay Contact Output Module: 8 points per common

2-8
2.2 I/O Modules

4) Analog Output Module

a) Function
An Analog Output Module converts the numeric data stored in output registers in the
state memory of the CPU Module into analog signals for control of heaters, pumps,
PID adjusters, inverters, etc.

b) Specifications
The following table shows the main specifications of the Analog Output Modules.

Table 2.6 Main Specifications of Analog Output Modules

Name Model Model Output Overall Resolution and Maxi- Num- Inter- Maxi- Hot
Name No. Signal Accuracy Data Types mum ber of nal Cur- mum Swap- 2
Range Permis- Chan- rent Heat- ping
sible nels Con- ing
sump-
Load Value
tion
Current
Analog D/A- JAMSC- -10 to ±0.2% F.S. 0 to 4000 mode: ±5 mA, 2 400 2.0 W Permit-
Output VOL- 120AVO +10 V (25 °C) 12 bits, binary 2 kΩ mA ted
Module 2CH 01000 between 0 and min.
(±10 V, 2 4000
channels) ±0.5% F.S. ±2000 mode: 12
(0 to bits, 2’s comple-
60 °C) ments between
-2000 and
+2000
Analog D/A JAMSC- 0 to +10 ±0.2% F.S. 12 bits, binary 5 mA, 2 400 2.0 W Permit-
Output 0-10V 120AVO V (25 °C) between 0 and 2 kΩ mA ted
Module (0 2CH 01100 ±0.5% F.S. 4000 min.
to 10 V, 2 (0 to 60 °C)
channels)
Analog D/A JAMSC- 0 to +5 ±0.2% F.S. 12 bits, binary 2.5 mA, 2 400 2.0 W Permit-
Output 0-5V 120AVO V (25 °C) between 0 and 2 kΩ mA ted
Module (0 2CH 01200 ±0.5% F.S. 4000 min.
to 5 V, 2 (0 to 60 °C)
channels)
Analog D/A- JAMSC- 4 to 20 ±0.2% F.S. 12 bits, binary 550 Ω 2 500 2.5 W Permit-
Output CUR- 120AC mA (25 °C) between 0 and max. mA ted
Module (4 2CH O01000 ±0.5% F.S. 4000
to 20 mA, (0 to 60 °C)
2 chan-
nels)
Other Specifications
1) Slots required: 1
2) Approx. mass : 350 g
3) Width: 40.3 mm Height: 130 mm Depth: 103.9 mm
4) Field connection: Terminal block

2-9
2 Models and General Specifications of I/O Modules
2.2.3 Using I/O Modules

2.2.3 Using I/O Modules

1) Installation Location of I/O Modules

(1) I/O Modules can be mounted to any slot of the Mounting Base of any Rack.
Each I/O Module occupies one slot.
(2) The following diagram shows an example on where to mount I/O Modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Slot No.
EXAMPLE
Rack 1 (CPU Rack)
PS10 CPU30 DI DI DO MC20 MC20 EXP

P M MB12

W0100-02

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Rack 2
PS DI DI DI DI DI DI DO DO DO DO EXP
05
MB12

PS10: Power Supply Module (7 A) MC20: 4-axis Motion Module

PS05: Power Supply Module (3 A) EXP: Expander Module
CPU30: CPU Module (32 kW) MB12: 12 slot Mounting Base
DI: 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module W0100-02: Rack-to-rack I/O Cable (0.2 m)
DO: 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module

Fig. 2.1 Example of Mounting I/O Modules

2) Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules

The following CPU Modules, Remote I/O Receiver Modules, and MEMOSOFT ver-
sions are required to user 64-point I/O Modules.

Table 2.7 Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules

Name Model Model No. Version Number Location of Ver-

Name sion Number
CPU Module CPU10 DDSCR-120CPU14200 A01 and later Module nameplate
(8 kw)
CPU Module CPU20 DDSCR-120CPU34100 B05 and later Module nameplate
(16 kw)
CPU Module CPU21 DDSCR-120CPU34110 A01 and later Module nameplate
(16 kw)
CPU Module CPU30 DDSCR-120CPU54100 B05 and later Module nameplate
(32 kw)
CPU Module CPU35 DDSCR-120CPU54110 A01 and later Module nameplate
(40 kw)
Remote I/O RIOR- DDSCR-120CRR13100 A10 and later Module nameplate
Receiver COAX
Module
MEMOSOFT FMSGL-AT3 1.21 and later In the middle at the
(for English DOS) bottom of the
MEMOSOFT
FMSGL-PP3E
startup screen
(for P120 English version)

Note: The nameplate is on the right side of the Module.

2-10
Digital I/O Specifications

3
This chapter describes the specifications of Digital I/O Modules.

3.1 Digital Input Module specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2

3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3
3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18

3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24

3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55

3.3 I/O Module Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60

3.3.1 I/O Module Cable Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.3.3 W0302 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74

3.4 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81

3.4.1 16-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
3.4.2 32-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
3.4.3 64-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
3.4.4 8-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92
3.4.5 16-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94
3.4.6 32-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
3.4.7 64-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101

3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106

3.5.1 MEMOSOFT Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - 3-106
3.5.2 Digital Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-107
3.5.3 Digital Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-108
3.5.4 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-109

3-1
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module

3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

This section describes the performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections, and the external appearance of the 120-series Digital Input Modules.

3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2

3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18

3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 100-VAC 16-point Input Module
Model Name AC100IN-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAI54300
Rated Voltage 100 VAC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 132 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Inrush Current 160 mA
Rated Current 7 mA (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz)
Input Impedance 14.3 kΩ (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz)
12.5 kΩ (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz)
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 74 to 132 VAC
OFF voltage range: 30 VAC max.
Input Type AC type2 (according to JIS B3502)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 20 ms max.
ON to OFF: 35 ms max.
Number of common 2
Number of Inputs per Common 8 points/common
Input Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and
Common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Number of Inputs 16
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input terminals and
internal circuits and between all input commons.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input termi-
nals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 100 VAC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)

3-2
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

Item Specifications
Maximum Heating Value 2.0 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approx. Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Input 1
Input signal
indicator

Input 8 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To CPU
3
Common 1

100 VAC

Input 9

Input 16

Common 2

100 VAC

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2.
If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may
occur.

3-3
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.1 100-VAC 16-point Input Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Terminals
Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Common 1

Not connected.

Input 9

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Input 16

Common 2

100 VAC Not connected.

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2.
If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may
occur.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminal for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5mm2 (AWG20) to connect to the terminal
block.
(3) Terminal 10 and terminal 20 are not connected.

3-4
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

4) External Appearance

Color code (pink)

Module description (120DAI54300)

LED area Removable terminal block Hinged terminal Signal label insert
for field connections cover

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Field wiring terminal

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DIA 543 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Always not lit.
2 10
3 11 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when
4 12 the input signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3-5
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module

3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 200-VAC 16-point Input Module
Model Name AC200IN-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAI74300
Rated Voltage 200 VAC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Inrush Current 320 mA
Rated Current 7 mA (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz)
Input Impedance 28.6 kΩ (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz)
23.1 kΩ (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz)
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 159 to 264 VAC
OFF voltage range: 40 VAC max.
Input Type AC type 2 (according to JIS B3502)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 20ms max.
ON to OFF: 35ms max.
Number of commons 2
Number of Inputs per Common 8 points/common
Input Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phases to the Common 1 and
Common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Number of Inputs 16
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input terminals and
internal circuits and between all input commons.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input termi-
nals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 200 VAC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 3.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approx. Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-6
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Input 1
Input signal
indicator

Input 8 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To CPU

Common 1

200 VAC

Input 9

Input 16
3

Common 2

200 VAC

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2.
If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may
occur.

3-7
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.2 200-VAC 16-point Input Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE Terminals
Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Common 1

Not connected.

Input 9

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Input 16

Common 2

200 VAC Not connected.

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2.
If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may
occur.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

3-8
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

4) External Appearance

Color code (pink)

Module description (120DAI74300)

LED area Removable terminal block Hinged terminal Signal label insert
for field connections cover

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Field wiring terminal

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DIA 743 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Always not lit.
2 10
1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when
3 11
4 12 the input signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3-9
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module

3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module

1) Performance Specifications

When 12-VDC Modules are used, the specifications do not comply with JIS B3502.

Item Specification
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Name 12/24 VDC 16-point Input Module
Model Name DC24IN-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DDI34300
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 30 VDC
Input Form Sourcing or sinking
Rated Current 4 mA 8 mA
Input Impedance 3.0 kΩ
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 9 VDC
OFF voltage range: 5 VDC
Input Type Not covered under JIS DC type 2 (according to JIS
B3502 B3502)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 5 ms max.
Number of Commons 2
Number of Inputs per Common 8 points/common
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Number of Inputs 16
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input
terminals and internal circuits and between all input com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
input terminals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12 VDC supplied to signals 24 VDC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 3.7 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-10
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Input 1
Input signal
indicator

Input 8 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To CPU

Common 1

12/24 VDC
Input 9

Input 16 3

Common 2

12/24 VDC

3-11
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.3 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE Terminals
Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

Common 1

Not connected
12/24 VDC
Input 9

Input 10

Input 11

Input 12

Input 13

Input 14

Input 15

Input 16

Common 2

12/24 VDC Not connected

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminal for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.8 mm2 (AWG18) to 0.2 mm2 (AWG24) to
connect to the terminal block.
(3) Terminal 10 and terminal 20 are not connected.
(4) The polarity of the external power supply for signals can be
either positive or negative.

3-12
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

4) External Appearance

Color code
(light blue)
Module description (120DDI34300)

LED area Removable terminal block Hinged terminal Signal label insert
for field connections cover

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Field wiring terminal

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDI 343 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Always not lit.
2 10
1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when
3 11
4 12 the input signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3-13
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module

3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module

1) Performance Specifications

When 12VDC Modules are used, the specifications do not comply with JIS B3502.

Item Specification
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Name 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module
Model Name DC24IN-32P
Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 30 VDC
Input Form Sourcing or sinking
Rated Current 2 mA 4 mA
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 9 VDC
OFF voltage range: 5VDC
Input Type Not covered under JIS DC type 2 (according to JIS
B3502 B3502)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 5 ms max.
Number of Commons 2
Number of Inputs per Common 16 points/common
External Connections 40-pin connector: one piece
Connector: 10340-52A2JL (made by 3M)
Number of Inputs 32
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input
terminals and internal circuits and between all input com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
input terminals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12 VDC supplied to signals 24 VDC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 80 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 3.6 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-14
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Input 1

Input 2

Input signal
Input 15 indicator

Input 16 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To CPU

Common 1

12/24 VDC 3

Input 17

Input 18

Input 31

Input 32

Common 2

12/24 VDC

3-15
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.4 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module

3) The following diagram shows an example or terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Pin No. Pin No.
12/24 VDC
Not Not
connected connected
Common 2

Input 32 Input 31

Input 30 Input 29

Input 28 Input 27

Input 26 Input 25

Input 24 Input 23

Input 22 Input 21

Input 20 Input 19

Input 18 Input 17
12/24 VDC Not Not
connected connected
Common 1

Input 16 Input 15

Input 14 Input 13

Input 12 Input 11

Input 10 Input 9

Input 8 Input 7

Input 6 Input 5

Input 4 Input 3

Input 2 Input 1

Note: (1) Pins 9 and 29, pins 19 and 39 are internally connected.
Connect these pins externally as well. Not connecting
them can cause malfunction.
(2) Connectors for External Connections
On the Module: 10240-52A2JL (manufactured by 3M)
(3) Recommended wires
Use wires of 0.08mm2 (AWG28) to connect to each pin of
the connector.
(4) The polarity of the external power supply for signals can be
connected with either plus or minus.
(5) Pins 10, 20, 30, and 40 are not connected.
(6) External Connection Cable
Use a 32-point I/O Module Cable to connect to field
devices. Refer to 3.3 I/O Module Cables for details.

3-16
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

4) External Appearance

Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert

Module description
(120DDI35400)
Color code
(light blue)

LED area

Module mounting screw 32-point I/O Module cable connector

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDI 354 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE
1 to 32 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the input
1 9 17 25 signal is ON.
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27
4 12 20 28
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
8 16 24 32

5) Special Purpose Components

The following components must be purchased separately.

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0300-

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0302-

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0301-

Terminal block connector for 32-point I/O type: XW2B-40F5-P (manufactured by
OMRON)

3-17
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module

Note: (1) The symbol “ -” in the type stands for length for the cable. See 3.3 I/O Mod-
ule Cables for details.
(2) The terminal block number for the 32-point I/O connector type (manufactured
by OMRON) is not that same as that for the 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Mod-
ule. Refer to 3.3 I/O Module Cables for details.

3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module

1) Performance Specifications

The Module does not conform to JIS B3502 when used as a 12-VDC Module.

Item Specification
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Name 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module
Model Name DC24IN-64P
Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Maximum Allowable 30 VDC
Voltage
Input Form Sourcing or sinking
Rated Current 2 mA 4 mA
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Standard Operating Minimum ON voltage: 9 VDC
Ranges Maximum OFF voltage: 5 VDC
Input Type Does not conform to JIS B3502. DC type 2 (according to JIS B3502)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 5 ms max.
Number of Commons 4
Number of Inputs per 16 points/common
Common
External Connections 40-pin connector: 2 pieces
Connector type: FCN-365P040 (made by Fujitsu)
Number of Inputs 64
Input Signal Indica- Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
tion Status saved in internal logic.
32 indicators controlled by toggle switches
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input terminals and
internal circuits and between all input commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input terminals
and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Sup- 12 VDC supplied to signals 24 VDC supplied to signals
ply
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Con- 100 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
sumption
Maximum Heating 7.0 W
Value

3-18
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

Item Specification
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion
under power)
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

CN1 connector pin

numbers
Input 1

Input 2

3
Input signal
Input 15 indicator

Input 16 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To
Common 1 CPU

12/24 VDC

Input 17

Input 18

Input 31

Input 32

Common 2

12/24 VDC

(Continued on next page)

3-19
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module

(Continued from previous page) CN2 connector pin

numbers
Input 33

Input 34

Input signal
Input 47 indicator

Input 48 Photocoupler

Internal circuits
To
Common 3
CPU

12/24 VDC

Input 49

Input 50

Input 63

Input 64

Common 4

12/24 VDC

3-20
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE

CN1 connector CN1 connector

pin numbers pin numbers
12/24 VDC Not Not
connected connected
Common 2 Common 2

Input 32 Input 31

Input 30 Input 29

Input 28 Input 27

Input 26 Input 25

Input 24 Input 23
3
Input 22 Input 21

Input 20 Input 19

Input 18 Input 17
12/24 VDC Not Not
connected connected
Common 2 Common 1

Input 16 Input 15

Input 14 Input 13

Input 12 Input 11

Input 10 Input 9

Input 8 Input 7

Input 6 Input 5

Input 4 Input 3

Input 2 Input 1

(Continued on next page)

Note: (1) CN1 pins A9 and B9 and pins A19 and B19 are internally connected. Connect
these pins externally as well. Not connecting them can cause malfunction.
(2) Pins A10, A20, B10, and B20 are not connected.
(3) The polarity of the external power supply for signals can be either positive or
negative.
(4) Connector for External Connections (included)
Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
(5) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.26 mm2 (AWG23) to connect to each connector pin.

3-21
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.1.5 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module

(Continued from previous page)

CN2 connector CN2 connector

pin numbers pin numbers
12/24 VDC
Not Not
connected connected
Common 4 Common 4

Input 64 Input 63

Input 62 Input 61

Input 60 Input 59

Input 58 Input 57

Input 56 Input 55

Input 54 Input 53

Input 52 Input 51

Input 50 Input 49
12/24 VDC Not Not
connected connected
Common 3 Common 3

Input 48 Input 47

Input 46 Input 45

Input 44 Input 43

Input 42 Input 41

Input 40 Input 39

Input 38 Input 37

Input 36 Input 35

Input 34 Input 33

Note: (1) CN2 pins A9 and B9 and pins A19 and B19 are internally connected. Connect
these pins externally as well. Not connecting them can cause malfunction.
(2) Pins A10, A20, B10, and B20 are not connected.
(3) The polarity of the external power supply for signals can be either positive or
negative.
(4) Connector for External Connections (included)
Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
(5) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.26 mm2 (AWG23) to connect to each connector pin.
(6) External Connection Cable
Two pairs of connectors to connect the external input signal and a 64-point I/O
Module Cable to connect to field devices are provided. For details, refer to 3.3
I/O Module Cables.

3-22
3.1 Digital Input Module specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description
(120DDI36400)

Color code
(light blue) Input signal indicator switch

LED area

3
CN1 connector

CN2 connector

Connector and
Module mounting screw cover (2 sets)
(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDI 364 00 LED Color Indication when ON Input Signal
Indicator Switch
ACTIVE ACTIVE Green Processing I/O. −
1 9 17 25 1 to 32 Green Input signal (1 to 32) is ON. Left side (1 to 32)
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27 Input signal (33 to 64) is ON. Right side (33 to 64)
4 12 20 28
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
8 16 24 32

5) Accessories
The following items are included in the accessories.

• Connector for External Connections

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)

3-23
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module

3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

This section describes the performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections, and external appearance of the 120-series Digital Output Modules.

3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24

3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55

3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module
Model Name ACOUT-8P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO83000
Rated Voltage 100/200 VAC
Allowable Voltage Range 80 to 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum Load Current 1.0 Arms/point
Output Voltage Drop 1.0 Vrms
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 5 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 3 mA max. at 240 VAC, 50 Hz
Minimum Load Current 10 mArms
Output Type Triac outputs
Number of Commons 8 (Each output circuit is independent.)
Output Power Supply Possible to connect different power supply phases to the commons.
per Common
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse None
Surge Suppressor Varistor
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 8
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during input processing.
Insulation Method Phototriac
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output terminals and
internal circuits and between all output circuits.

3-24
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

Item Specifications
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input termi-
nals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 100/200 VAC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 50 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 9.0 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approx. Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

3
Output signal
indicator

Phototriac
Internal circuits

Output 1
From CPU

100/200 VAC

Output 8

100/200 VAC

CAUTION If using a 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse does not built into the following 100/200-VAC 8-point Output
Modules. If a fuse is not connected, fire or damage to the devices or output cir-
cuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

3-25
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.1 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Fuses Loads

Output 1
100/200 VAC
ACIN 1

Output 2
100/200 VAC
ACIN 2

Output 3
100/200 VAC
ACIN 3

Output 4
100/200 VAC
ACIN 4

Not
connected
Not connected

Fuses Loads
Output 5
100/200 VAC
ACIN 5

Output 6

ACIN 6 100/200 VAC

Output 7
100/200 VAC
ACIN 7

Output 8

ACIN 8 100/200 VAC

Not
connected

Not connected

CAUTION If using a 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 1.3mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5mm2 (AWG20) to connect to the terminal
block.

3-26
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description (120DAO83000)

Color code Removable terminal block Hinged terminal Signal label insert
(red) for field connections cover

LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Terminal block mounting screw

Field wiring terminal (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DAO 830 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE
1 to 8 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
1 signal is ON.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

3-27
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module

3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module
Model Name ACOUT-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300
Rated Voltage 100/200 VAC
Allowable Voltage Range 80 to 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum Load Current 0.6 Arms/point, 2.4 A/common
Output Voltage Drop 1.0 Vrms
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 5 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 3 mA max. at 240 VAC, 50 Hz
Minimum Load Current 7 mArms
Output Type Triac outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
Output Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common
1 and Common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Two, 5-A fuses (one per common)
(Burnout time: 2 min max. at 200 % of rated current)
Surge Suppressor Varistor
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output the is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when fuse is burnt out or output power supply is not
connected
Insulation Method Phototriac
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits and between all output com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. (room temperature and humidity) between out-
put terminals and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 100/200 VAC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 300 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 5.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-28
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output 1 Loads
Output signal
indicator

Phototriac Output 8

Internal circuits
From CPU

Fuse
Common 1-1

100/200 VAC
Blown fuse
Power not
connected indicator
Blown fuse
detection circuit
Common 1-2
3
Output 9 Loads

Output 16

Common 2-1

100/200 VAC
Common 2-2

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuse of the 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Modules.
If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved
technician, failure or malfunction may occur in the Modules.

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

CAUTION If using a 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Modules
does not protect the output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or dam-
age to the devices or output circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or
the circuit overloaded.

3-29
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.2 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE Terminals Fuses

Loads
Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Common 1-1

Common 1-2
Fuses
Loads
Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

Common 2-1

100/200 VAC
Common 2-2

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1 and Common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phase are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

CAUTION If using a 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
User wires of 1.3mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5mm2 (AWG20) to connect to the terminal
block. Use wires of the size more than 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) for common lines.

3-30
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

4) External Appearance

Color code Removable terminal block

(red) for field connections
Module description
(120DAO84300) Hinged terminal Signal label insert
cover
LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DAO 843 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
1 9 connected.
2 10
3 11 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
4 12 signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3-31
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module

3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module
Model Name DC24OUT-8P
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO33000
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sourcing or sinking
Maximum Load Current 2.0 A/point
Output Voltage Drop 0.1 V max (2.0 A)
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 3 ms max.
ON to OFF: 5 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. at 24 VDC
Output Type Transistor (FET) outputs
Number of Commons 8 (Each output circuit is independent.)
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Protected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Eight, 3.5-A fuses (one per circuit)
(Burnout time: 1 s max. at 200% of rated current)
Surge Suppressor Zener diode
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 8
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing.
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals (connected together) and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 1.6 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-32
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output signal
indicator Output 1A Loads

Photocoupler

Internal circuits
From CPU Sinking connection

Fuse Output 1B

12/24 VDC

Output 2A

12/24 VDC
3
Output 2B Loads

Sourcing connection

Output 8A

12/24 VDC

Output 8B Loads

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 8-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 8-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with the
load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Modules
does not protect the output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or dam-
age to the devices or output circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or
the circuit overloaded.

Note: A blown-fuse detection circuit is not built into the circuit. If no output current flows
while the output signal indicator is lit under the rated voltage, the built-in fuse may
be blown. The built-in fuse must be replaced by a Yaskawa service representative.

3-33
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.3 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Loads
Output 1A
12/24 VDC
Output 1B

Output 2A
12/24 VDC
Output 2B

Output 3A
12/24 VDC
Output 3B

Output 4A
12/24 VDC
Output 4B
Not
connected
Sinking connection
Not connected Sourcing connection

Output 5A
Loads
Output 5B
12/24 VDC
Output 6A

Output 6B
12/24 VDC
Output 7A

Output 7B
12/24 VDC
Output 8A

Output 8B
Not 12/24 VDC
connected

Not connected

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with the
load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 crimp terminals for the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.8 mm2 (AWG18) to 0.2 mm2 (AWG24) to connect to the terminal
block.
(3) A blown-fuse detection circuit is not built into the circuit. If no output current
flows while the output signal indicator is lit under the rated voltage, the built-in
fuse may be blown. The built-in fuse must be replaced by a Yaskawa service
representative.

3-34
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description (120DDO33000)

Color code Removable terminal block

(dark blue) for field connections Hinged terminal Signal label insert
cover

LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Terminal block mounting screw
Field wiring terminal (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDO 330 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE
1 to 8 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
1 signal is ON.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

3-35
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking)

3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 12/24 VDC 16-point Output Module
Model Name DC24OUT-16PSN
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34310
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sinking
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 1.0 A/4 points
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 V max (0.5 A)
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 1 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. at 24 VDC
Output Type Transistor outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Two, 4-A fuses (one per common)
(Burnout time: 5 s max. at 200% of rated current)
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when fuse is burnt out or output power supply is not
connected
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits and between all output com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 7.1 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-36
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output 1 Loads
Output signal
indicator

Photocoupler

Internal circuits
From CPU
Output 8

Fuse -Common 1
Blown fuse
Power not 12/24 VDC
connected
indicator
Blown fuse
3
+ Common 1
detection circuit

Output 9 Loads

Output 16

- Common 2

+ Common 12/24 VDC

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sinking), connect a fuse, which
complies with the load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Modules
does not protect the output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or dam-
age to the devices or output circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or
the circuit overloaded.

3-37
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.4 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sinking)

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE Terminals Fuse

Loads
Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

- Common 1
12/24 VDC
+ Common 1
Fuse
Loads
Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

- Common 2
12/24 VDC
+ Common 2

CAUTION Although a 0.5 A load can be connected to each output point of the 12/24-VDC 16-
point Output Module (sinking), the total load must be 1.0A or less for each of the four
output points shown in the shaded areas. Keep the load distribution within the 1.0A
limit.

It this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sinking), connect a fuse, which
complies with the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.8mm2 (AWG18) to 0.2mm2 (AWG24) to connect to the terminal
block.

3-38
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

4) External Appearance

Color code
(dark blue)
Module description
(120DDO34310)
Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert
LED area Removable terminal block
for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDO 343 10 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
1 9 connected.
2 10
3 11 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
4 12 signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

INFO • Users can replace the fuses.

5) Spare Parts
Reserve the following spare part for maintenance.
Fuse Type: 235004 (LITTEL FUSE)

3-39
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing)

3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing)
Model Name DC24OUT-16PSR
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34320
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sourcing
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 1.0 A/4 points
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 V max (0.5 A)
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 1 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. at 24 VDC
Output Type Transistor outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Two, 4-A fuses (one per common)
(Burnout time: 5 s max. at 200% of rated current)
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when fuse is burnt out or output power supply is not
connected
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits and between all output com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 300 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 7.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-40
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output 1 Loads
Output signal
indicator

Internal circuits
Photocoupler
From CPU
Output 8

- Common 1

Blown fuse/
Power disconnected
indicator
Blown-fuse
detection circuit
Fuse
+ Common 1 3
12/24 VDC

Output 9 Loads

Output 16

- Common 2

+ Common 2

12/24 VDC

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sourcing), connect a fuse, which
complies with the load specifications, in series with the load.

3-41
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.5 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (Sourcing)

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Fuses
Loads
Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

- Common 1
12/24 VDC
+ Common 1
Fuses
Loads
Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

- Common 2
12/24 VDC
+ Common 2

CAUTION Although a 0.5 A load can be connected to each output point of the 12/24-VDC 16-
point Output Module (sourcing), the total load must be 1.0 A or less for each of the
four output points shown in the shaded area. Keep the load distribution within the 1.0
A limit.

It this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sourcing), connect a fuse, which
complies with the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.8mm2 (AWG18) to 0.2mm2 f(AWG24) to connect to the terminal
block.

3-42
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description (120DDO34320)

Color code Removable terminal block Hinged terminal Signal label insert
(dark blue) for field connections cover

LED area

Fuse
3

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDO 343 20 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
1 9 connected.
2 10
3 11 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
4 12 signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

INFO • Users can replace the fuses.

5) Spare Parts
Reserve the following spare part for maintenance.
Fuse Type: 235004 (LITTEL FUSE)

3-43
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module

3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 12/24 VDC 32-point Output Module
Model Name DC24OUT-32P
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sinking
Maximum Load Current 0.3 A/point, 0.4 A/4 points
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 V max (0.3 A)
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 1 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. at 24 VDC
Output Type Transistor outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 16 points/common
External Connections 40-pin connector: one piece
Connector: 10340-52A2JL (manufacutured by 3M)
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Two, 3.5-A fuses (one per common)
(Burnout time: 1 s max. at 200 % of rated current)
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 32
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when fuse is burnt out or output power supply is not
connected
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits and between all output com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals (connected together) and ground
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 330 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 6.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-44
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output 1 Loads

Output 2
Output signal
indicator

Photocoupler

Internal circuits
Output 15
From CPU
Output 16

Fuse - Common 1
Blown fuse
Power not
connected 12/24 VDC
indicator
Blown fuse +Common 1
3
detection circuit

Output 17 Loads

Output 18

Output 31

Output 32

- Common 2

12/24 VDC

+ Common 2

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuse of the 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Modules.
If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved
technician, failure or malfunction may occur in the Modules.

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Modules
does not protect the output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or dam-
age to the devices or output circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or
the circuit overloaded.

3-45
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE

Pin No. Pin No.

+ Common 2
12/24 VDC
- Common 2
Fuses Fuses
Loads Loads
Output 32 Output 31

Output 30 Output 29

Output 28 Output 27

Output 26 Output 25

Output 24 Output 23

Output 22 Output 21

Output 20 Output 19

Output 18 Output 17

+ Common 1
12/24 VDC
- Common 1
Fuses Fuses
Loads Loads
Output 16 Output 15

Output 14 Output 13

Output 12 Output 11

Output 10 Output 9

Output 8 Output 7

Output 6 Output 5

Output 4 Output 3

Output 2 Output 1

CAUTION Although a 0.3 A load can be connected to each output point of 12/24-VDC 32-point
Output Module, the total load must be 0.4 A or less for each of the four output points
shown in the shaded area. Keep the load distribution within the 0.4 A limit.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

3-46
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

Note: (1) Pins 9 and 29, pins 19 and 39, pins 10 and 30, pins 20 and 40 are internally
connected. Connect these pins externally as well, otherwise, malfunction may
occur.
(2) Connector for External Connections
On the Module: 10240-52A2JL (made by 3M)
(3) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.08mm2 (AWG28) to connect to each connector pin.
(4) External Connection Cable
Use a 32-point I/O Module Cable to connect to field devices. Refer to 3.3 I/O
Module Cables for details.

4) External Appearance

Hinged terminal Signal label insert

cover

Module description
(120DDO35410)
Color code 3
(dark blue)
LED area

Module mounting screw 32-point I/O Module cable connector

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDO 354 10 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
1 9 17 25 connected.
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27 1 to 32 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
4 12 20 28 signal is ON.
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
8 16 24 32

3-47
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.6 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module

5) Special Purchase Components

The following components must be purchased separately.

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0300-

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0302-

• 32-point I/O Module Cable Type: JZMSZ-120W0301-

Terminal Block for 32-point I/O connector Type: XW2B-40F5-P
(manufactured by OMRON)

Note: (1) The symbol “-” in the type stands for the length of the
cable. See section 3.3 I/O Module Cables for details.
(2) The terminal block number for the 32-point I/O connector
type (made by OMRON) is not that same as that for the 12/
24-VDC 32-point Output Module. Refer to 3.3 I/O Module
Cables.

3-48
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module (Sinking)
Model Name DC24OUT-64PSN
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sinking
Maximum Load Current 0.1 A/points
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 V max (0.1 A)
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 1 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1 ms max. 3
OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. at 24 VDC
Output Type Transistor outputs
Number of Commons 4
Number of Outputs per Common 16 points/common
External Connections 40-pin connector: 2 pieces
Connector: FCN-365P040 (manufactured by Fujitsu)
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse Four, 2-A fuses (one per common)
(Burnout time: 1 s max. at 200 % of rated current)
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 64
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
32 indicators controlled by toggle switches
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when fuse is burnt out or output power supply is not
connected
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output
terminals and internal circuits and between all output com-
mons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 650 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Maximum Heating Value 13 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

3-49
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

CN1 connector
pin numbers Output 1 Loads

Output signal Output 2

indicator

Photo-
Internal circuits coupler Output 15
From CPU
Output 16

Fuse
- Common 1

Blown fuse/power 12/24 VDC

disconnection indi-
cator
Blown-fuse
+ Common 1
detection circuit

Output 17 Loads

Output 18

Output 31

Output 32

- Common 2

12/24 VDC

+ Common 2

(Continued on next page)

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuse of the 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Modules.
If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved
technician, failure or malfunction may occur in the Modules.

3-50
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

(Continued from previous page)

CN2 connector
pin numbers Output 33 Loads

Output 34
Output signal
indicator

Photocoupler
Internal circuits Output 47
From CPU
Output 48

Fuse
- Common 3

Blown fuse/power
disconnection indi- 12/24 VDC

3
cator
Blown-fuse
+ Common 3
detection circuit

Output 49 Loads

Output 50

Output 63

Output 64

- Common 4

12/24 VDC

+ Common 4

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse built into the following 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Modules
does not protect the output element. If a fuse is not connected, a fire or dam-
age to the devices or output circuits may occur if the load is short-circuited or
the circuit overloaded.

3-51
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module

3) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
CN1 connector CN1 connector
pin numbers pin numbers
+ Common 2 + Common 2
12/24 VDC
- Common 2 - Common 2

Loads Fuses Fuses

Loads
Output 32 Output 31

Output 30 Output 29

Output 28 Output 27

Output 26 Output 25

Output 24 Output 23

Output 22 Output 21

Output 20 Output 19

Output 18 Output 17
+ Common 1 + Common 1
12/24 VDC
- Common 1 - Common 1

Fuses Fuses
Loads Loads
Output 16 Output 15

Output 14 Output 13

Output 12 Output 11

Output 10 Output 9

Output 8 Output 7

Output 6 Output 5

Output 4 Output 3

Output 2 Output 1

(Continued on next page)

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) CN1 pins A9 and B9, pins A10 and B10, pins A19 and B19, and pins A20 and
B20 are internally connected. Connect these pins externally as well. Not con-
necting them can cause malfunction.
(2) Connector for External Connections (included)
Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
(3) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.26 mm2 (AWG23) to connect to each connector pin.

3-52
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

CN2 connector CN2 connector

pin numbers pin numbers
+ Common 4 + Common 4
12/24 VDC
- Common 4 - Common 4

Loads Fuses Fuses

Loads
Output 64 Output 63

Output 62 Output 61

Output 60 Output 59

Output 58 Output 57

Output 56 Output 55

Output 54 Output 53
3
Output 52 Output 51

Output 50 Output 49
+ Common 3 + Common 3
12/24 VDC
- Common 3 - Common 3

Loads Fuses Fuses

Loads
Output 48 Output 47

Output 46 Output 45

Output 44 Output 43

Output 42 Output 41

Output 40 Output 39

Output 38 Output 37

Output 36 Output 35

Output 34 Output 33

CAUTION If using a 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with
the load specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) CN2 pins A9 and B9, pins A10 and B10, pins A19 and B19, and pins A20 and
B20 are internally connected. Connect these pins externally as well. Not con-
necting them can cause malfunction.
(2) External Connection Cable
Two pairs of connectors to connect the external output signal and a 64-point I/O
Module Cable to connect to field devices are provided. For details, refer to 3.3
I/O Module Cables.

3-53
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.7 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module

4) External Appearance

Module description
(120DDO36410)

Color code
(dark blue)
Output signal indicator
switch

LED area

CN1 connector

CN2 connector

Connector and cover (2 sets)

Module mounting screw
(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DDO 364 10 LED Color Indication when ON Output Signal
Indicator Switch
ACTIVE F ACTIVE Green Processing I/O. −
1 9 17 25 F Red Fuse blown out, or external −
2 10 18 26
3 11
power supply not connected.
19 27
4 12 20 28 1 to 32 Green Output signal (1 to 32) is ON. Left side (1 to 32)
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30 Output signal (33 to 64) is Right side
7 15 23 31 ON. (33 to 64)
8 16 24 32

5) Accessories
The following items are included in the accessories.

• Connector for External Connections

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)

3-54
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name Relay Contact 16-point Output Module
Model Name RELAY-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84300
Rated Voltage/Current 200 VAC, 1 A, resistive load
24 VDC, 1 A, resistive load
Maximum Load Power 750 VA (AC loads)
90W (DC loads)
Maximum Load Voltage 264 VAC/125 VDC
Minimum Load 100 mVDC, 0.1 mA
Contact Specifications

Voltage/Current
Contact Resistance 100 mΩ max.
3
Contact Life Electrical 3 A at 30 VDC, resistive load: 100,000 operations min.
1 A at 30 VDC, resistive load: 300,000 operations min.
τ = 7 ms: 150,000 operations min.
τ = 40 ms: 40,000 operations min.
1 A at 120 VAC, cosφ = 1.0: 400,000 operations min.
cosφ = 0.4: 250,000 operations min.
1 A at 240 VAC, cosφ = 1.0: 300,000 operations min.
cosφ = 0.4: 200,000 operations min.
Mechanical 20 million operations min.
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 10 ms max.
ON to OFF: 15 ms max.
Output Type Relay contact outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
Output Power Supply per Connect power supplies of the same phase to the Common 1
Common and Common 2 for 100/200VAC.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B3502)
Built-in Fuse None
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
Insulation Method Relay
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output termi-
nals and internal circuits and between all output commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between output
terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test voltage
megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 100/200 VAC or 24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 610 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)

3-55
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module

Item Specifications
Maximum Heating Value 3.1 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Output 1 Loads
Output signal
indicator

Relay Output 8
Internal circuits

From CPU

Common 1

100/200 VAC

12/24 VDC

Output 9 Loads

Output 16

Common 2

100/200 VAC

12/24 VDC

CAUTION If using a single-phase 100/200-VAC power supply for driving loads of the Relay
Contact Output Module, connect a power supply of the same phase to the Common 1
and Common 2 of the Relay Contact Output Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

CAUTION If using a Relay Contact Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with the load
specifications, in series with the load.

A protective fuse does not built into the following Relay Contact Output Mod-
ules. If a fuse is not connected, fire or damage to the devices or output circuits
may occur if the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

3-56
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

3) The following illustration shows an example of terminal connections with AC loads.

Terminals Loads
EXAMPLE Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Common 1

Not connected. 3
Loads
Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

Common 2

Not connected. 100/200 VAC

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

result.

CAUTION If using a Relay Contact Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with the load
specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to connect to the terminal
block. Use cables of the size more than 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) for common lines.
(3) Terminal 10 and terminal 20 are not connected.

3-57
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.2.8 Relay Contact 16-point Output Module

4) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections with DC loads.

Terminals
EXAMPLE Loads
Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Common 1

Not connected.
12/24 VDC

Loads
Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

Common 2

Not connected.
12/24 VDC

CAUTION If using a Relay Contact Output Module, connect a fuse, which complies with the load
specifications, in series with the load.

Note: (1) Crimp Terminals

Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use wires of 0.8 mm2 (AWG18) to 0.2 mm2 (AWG24) to connect to the terminal
block.
(3) Terminal 10 and terminal 20 are not connected.

3-58
3.2 Digital Output Module Specifications

5) External Appearance

Color code
(yellow)
Module description (120DRA84300)
Hinged terminal cover Signal label
LED area insert
Removable terminal block
for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DRA 843 00 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O.
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Always not lit.
2 10
1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when
3 11
4 12 the output signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3-59
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.1 I/O Module Cable Types

3.3 I/O Module Cables

This section describes the use and types together with the specifications of the I/O
Module Cables.

3.3.1 I/O Module Cable Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60

3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.3.3 W0302 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74

3.3.1 I/O Module Cable Types

1) 32-point I/O Module Cables

a) Use
The 32-point I/O Module Cables are used to connect external devices to the Mod-
ules listed below.
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400)

• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410)

• One-axis Motion Module (Model No. JAMSC-120MMB10100)

• Two-axis Motion Module (Model No. JAMSC-120MMB20200)

b) Types
There are nine types of 32-point I/O Module Cables, as shown in the following table.

Table 3.1 32-point I/O Module Cables

Product Name Model Model Features Cable

Name Number Length
32-point W0300 Cable W0300-01 JZMSZ- 1) Used to connect external devices to 32-point Input 1.0 m
I/O 120W0300-01 Modules, 32-point Output Modules, and Motion
Module W0300-03 JZMSZ- Control Modules (MC10 and MC15). 3.0 m
Cables 120W0300-03 2) Cables provide connector on Module end and with
W0300-05 JZMSZ- loose wires (AWG28: 0.08 mm2) on external 5.0 m
120W0300-05 device end.
W0302 Cable W0302-01 JZMSZ- 1) Used to connect external devices to 32-point Input 1.0 m
120W0302-01 Modules, 32-point Output Modules, and Motion
W0302-03 JZMSZ- Control Modules (MC10 and MC15). 3.0 m
120W0302-03 2) Cables provide connector on Module end and with
W0302-05 JZMSZ- loose wires (AWG24: 0.2 mm2) on external device 5.0 m
120W0302-05 end.
W0301 Cable W0301-01 JZMSZ- 1) Used to connect external devices to 32-point Input 1.0 m
120W0301-01 Modules, 32-point Output Modules, and Motion
W0301-03 JZMSZ- Control Modules (MC10 and MC15). 3.0 m
120W0301-03 2) Cables provide connector on both Module and
external device ends
W0301-05 JZMSZ- 5.0 m
120W0301-05 3) Used in combination with a connector terminal
block for 32-point I/O Modules.

INFO
The difference between the W0300 Cable and the W0302 Cable is the size of the
end which connects to the Module Connector.

3-60
3.3 I/O Module Cables

2) 64-point I/O Module Cables

a) Use
The 64-point I/O Module Cables are used to connect external devices to the follow-
ing Modules.

• 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400)

• 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410)

• Register Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120RDI34410)

• Register Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120RDO34410)

b) Types
Three types of 64-point I/O Module Cables are available.

Table 3.2 64-point I/O Module Cables

3
Product Name Model Model Features Cable
Name Number Length
64-point W5410 Cable W5410-05 JEPMC- 1) Used to connect external devices to 64-point I/O 0.5 m
I/O W5410-05 Modules.
Module 2) Cables have a connector on the Module end and
W5410-10 JEPMC- 1.0 m
Cables loose wires on the end for external device.
W5410-10
W5410-30 JEPMC- 3.0 m
W5410-30

3-61
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-)

3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-)

1) Use
(1) This Cable is used to connect external devices to the Modules listed below.
(a) 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400)
(b) 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410)
(2) The end of the Cable to the external device is loose wires.

2) Specifications
The following table shows specifications of W0300 Cables.

Table 3.3 Specifications of W0300 Cable

Item Specifications
Model Name W0300-01 W0300-03 W0300-05
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-01 JZMSZ-120W0300-03 JZMSZ-120W0300-05
Length L 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Shielded cable, 40 cores, equivalent to UL20276, AWG28 (0.08 mm2)
Specifications
Cable Module Connector: Connector 10140-6000EL (3M)
Termination side Shell 10640-5500-008 (3M)
Screw 3342-26 (3M)
Latch 10600-L0F0-8 (3M)
External Loose wires: Wire length 150 mm with pin number label on
device each wire.
side
Insulation 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between core wires (con-
Resistance nected together) and shielding wire, and between core wires (measured
with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).

3) Appearance
The following illustration shows the appearance of a W0300 Cable.

Connector (Module side)

Model Name Loose wires (external device side)

A pin number label is on each loose wire

Shielded cable
40-core
loose
wires

150 mm

INFO The difference between the W0300 Cable and the W0302 Cable is the size of the end
which connects to the Module Connector.

3-62
3.3 I/O Module Cables

4) Connecting to External Input Device with Cable W0300

The following diagram shows signal names of wires when the W0300 Cable con-
nects the 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module to an external input device. Connector
pin numbers and dot marks are on each loose wire to identify the wire number and
its signal name.

Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1 mm

Connector on Loose wire side Color
the Module side Dash: approx. 3 mm
Shielded cable Wire No. Space: approx. 2 mm
Pin No. Not connected Pink      
Not connected Pink − − − − − − − −
Common 2 Yellow      
Common 2 Yellow − − − − − − − −
Input 32 White      
Input 31 White − − − − − − − −
Input 30 Light gray       3
Input 29 Light gray − − − − − − − −
Input 28 Orange      
Input 27 Orange − − − − − − − −
Input 26 Pink      
Input 25 Pink − − − − − − − −
Input 24 Yellow    
Input 23 Yellow − − − − − −
Input 22 White    
Input 21 White − − − − − −
Input 20 Light gray    
Input 19 Light gray − − − − − −
Input 18 Orange    
Input 17 Orange − − − − − −
Not connected Pink  
Not connected Pink − − − −
Common 1 Yellow  
Common 1 Yellow − − − −
Input 16 White  
Input 15 White − − − −
Input 14 Light gray  
Input 13 Light gray − − − −
Input 12 Orange  
Input 11 Orange − − − −
Input 10 Pink −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 9 Pink − −
Input 8 Yellow −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 7 Yellow − −
Input 6 White −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 5 White − −
Input 4 Light gray − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Input 3 Light gray − −
Input 2 Orange −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 1 Orange − −

3-63
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.2 W0300 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-)

5) Connecting to External Output Device with Cable W0300

The following diagram shows signal names of wires when the W0300 Cable con-
nects the 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module to an external output device. Connec-
tor pin numbers and dot marks are on each loose wire to identify the wire number
and its signal name.

Connector on Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1 mm

Loose wire side Color
the Module side Dash: approx. 3 mm
Shielded cable Wire No. Space: approx. 2 mm
+Common 2 Pink      
+Common 2 Pink − − − − − − − −
-Common 2 Yellow      
-Common 2 Yellow − − − − − − − −
Output 32 White      
Output 31 White − − − − − − − −
Output 30 Light gray      
Output 29 Light gray − − − − − − − −
Output 28 Orange      
Output 27 Orange − − − − − − − −
Output 26 Pink      
Output 25 Pink − − − − − − − −
Output 24 Yellow    
Output 23 Yellow − − − − − −
Output 22 White    
Output 21 White − − − − − −
Output 20 Light gray    
Output 19 Light gray − − − − − −
Output 18 Orange    
Output 17 Orange − − − − − −
+Common 2 Pink  
+Common 2 Pink − − − −
-Common 1 Yellow  
-Common 1 Yellow − − − −
Output 16 White  
Output 15 White − − − −
Output 14 Light gray  
Output 13 Light gray − − − −
Output 12 Orange  
Output 11 Orange − − − −
Output 10 Pink −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 9 Pink − −
Output 8 Yellow −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 7 Yellow − −
Output 6 White −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 5 White − −
Output 4 Light gray − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Output 3 Light gray − −
Output 2 Orange −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 1 Orange − −

3-64
3.3 I/O Module Cables

3.3.3 W0302 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-)

2) Specifications
The following table shows specifications of W0302 Cables.

Table 3.4 Specifications of W0302 Cable

Item Specifications
Model Name W0302-01 W0302-03 W0302-05
3
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-01 JZMSZ-120W0302-03 JZMSZ-120W0302-05
Length L 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Shielded cable, 40 cores, equivalent to UL20276, AWG24 (0.20 mm2)
Specifications
Cable Module Connector: Connector 10140-6000EL (3M)
Termination side Shell 10640-5500-008 (3M)
Screw 3342-26 (3M)
Latch 10600-L0F0-8 (3M)
External Loose wires: Wire length 150 mm with pin number label on
device each wire.
side
Insulation 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between core wires
Resistance (connected together) and shielding wire, and between core wires
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).

3) Appearance
The following illustration shows the appearance of a W0302 Cable.

Connector (Module side)

Model Name
Loose wires (external device side)
A pin number label is on each loose wire

Shielded cable 40-core

loose
wires

150 mm

INFO The difference between the W0300 Cable and the W0302 Cable is the size of the end
which connects to the Module Connector.

3-65
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.3 W0302 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-)

4) Connecting to External Input Device with Cable W0302

The following diagram shows signal names of wires when the W0302 Cable con-
nects the 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module to an external input device. Connector
pin numbers and dot marks are on each loose wire to identify the wire number and
its signal name.

Connector on Loose wire side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1 mm
the Module side Color Dash: approx. 3 mm
Shielded cable Wire No. Space: approx. 2 mm
Pin No.
Not connected Gray      
Not connected Gray − − − − − − − −
Common 2 Orange      
Common 2 Orange − − − − − − − −
Input 32 Green      
Input 31 Green − − − − − − − −
Input 30 Pink      
Input 29 Pink − − − − − − − −
Input 28 Light blue      
Input 27 Light blue − − − − − − − −
Input 26 Gray    
Input 25 Gray − − − − − −
Input 24 Orange    
Input 23 Orange − − − − − −
Input 22 Green    
Input 21 Green − − − − − −
Input 20 Pink    
Input 19 Pink − − − − − −
Input 18 Light blue    
Input 17 Light blue − − − − − −
Not connected Gray  
Not connected Gray − − − −
Common 1 Orange  
Common 1 Orange − − − −
Input 16 Green  
Input 15 Green − − − −
Input 14 Pink  
Input 13 Pink − − − −
Input 12 Light blue  
Input 11 Light blue − − − −
Input 10 Gray −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 9 Gray − −
Input 8 Orange −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 7 Orange − −
Input 6 Green −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 5 Green − −
Input 4 Pink −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 3 Pink − −
Input 2 Light blue −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Input 1 Light blue − −

3-66
3.3 I/O Module Cables

5) Connecting to External Output Device with Cable W0302

The following diagram shows signal names of wires when the W0302 Cable con-
nects the 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module to an external output device. Connec-
tor pin numbers and dot marks are on each loose wire to identify the wire number
and its signal name.

Connector on Loose wire side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1 mm
the Module side Color Dash: approx. 3 mm
Pin No. Shielded cable Wire No. Space: approx. 2 mm
+Common 2 Gray      
+Common 2 Gray − − − − − − − −
-Common 2 Orange      
-Common 2 Orange − − − − − − − −
Output 32 Green      
Output 31 Green − − − − − − − −
Output 30 Pink       3
Output 29 Pink − − − − − − − −
Output 28 Light blue      
Output 27 Light blue − − − − − − − −
Output 26 Gray    
Output 25 Gray − − − − − −
Output 24 Orange    
Output 23 Orange − − − − − −
Output 22 Green    
Output 21 Green − − − − − −
Output 20 Pink    
Output 19 Pink − − − − − −
Output 18 Light blue    
Output 17 Light blue − − − − − −
+Common 1 Gray  
+Common 1 Gray − − − −
-Common 1 Orange  
-Common 1 Orange − − − −
Output 16 Green  
Output 15 Green − − − −
Output 14 Pink  
Output 13 Pink − − − −
Output 12 Light blue  
Output 11 Light blue − − − −
Output 10 Gray −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 9 Gray − −
Output 8 Orange −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 7 Orange − −
Output 6 Green −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 5 Green − −
Output 4 Pink −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 3 Pink − −
Output 2 Light blue −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
Output 1 Light blue − −

3-67
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-)

3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-)

1) Use
(1) This Cable is used to connect external devices to the Modules listed below.
(a) 12/24VDC 32-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400)
(b) 12/24VDC 32-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410)
(2) The end of the Cable on the external device is fitted with a connector.
Use the Cable in combination with a 32-point I/O connector Terminal Block.
See 3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block for information about the 32-
point I/O connector Terminal Block.

2) Specifications
The following table shows specifications of W0301 Cables.

Table 3.5 Specifications of W0301 Cable

Item Specifications
Model Name W0301-01 W0301-03 W0301-05
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-01 JZMSZ-120W0301-03 JZMSZ-120W0301-05
Length L 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Shielded cable, 40 cores, equivalent to UL20276, AWG28 (0.08 mm2)
Specifications
Cable Module Connector: Connector 10140–6000EL (3M)
Termination side Shell 10640-5500-008 (3M)
Screw 3342-26 (3M)
Latch 10600-L0F0-8 (3M)
External Connector fitted: FCN-361J040-AU + FCN-360C040-E
device (made by Fujitsu Ltd.).
side
Insulation 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between core wires
Resistance (connected together) and shielding wire, and between core wires
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).

3) Appearance
The following illustration shows the appearance of a W0301 Cable.

Connector 1 (Module side)

Model name Connector 2 (external device side)

Shielded cable

3-68
3.3 I/O Module Cables

4) Connecting to External Input Device with Cable W0301

The following diagram shows the signal names of terminals when the W0301 Cable
and 32-point terminal I/O terminal connector block are used to connect the 12/24
VDC 32-point Input Module to an external input device.

32-point I/O Module Cable (W0301) 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (XW2B-40F5-P)
Terminal block
Connector on the Connector
Connector on terminal block side
the Module side Signal name Signal name
Shielded cable Pin No. Not con-
Pin No.
Pin No. nected
Not connected
Common 2
Common 2
Input 32
Input 31
Input 30 3
Input 29
Input 28
Input 27
Input 26
Input 25
Input 24
Input 23
Input 22
Input 21
Input 20
Input 19
Input 18
Input 17
Not con-
nected
Not connected
Common 1
Common 1
Input 16
Input 15
Input 14
Input 13
Input 12
Input 11
Input 10
Input 9
Input 8
Input 7
Input 6
Input 5
Input 4
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1

3-69
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.4 W0301 Cables (Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-)

5) Connecting to External Output Device with Cable W0301

The following diagram shows the signal names of wires when the W0301 Cable and
32-point I/O connector Terminal Block are used to connect the 12/24 VDC 32-point
Output Module to an external output device.

32-point I/O Module Cable (W0301) 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (XW2B-40F5-P)

Terminal block
Connector on Connector on the Connector
the Module side terminal block side
Signal name Signal name
Shielded cable Pin No.
Pin No. +Common 2
Pin No.
+Common 2
-Common 2
-Common 2
Output 32
Output 31
Output 30
Output 29
Output 28
Output 27
Output 26
Output 25
Output 24
Output 23
Output 22
Output 21
Output 20
Output 19
Output 18
Output 17
+Common 1
+Common 1
-Common 1
-Common 1
Output 16
Output 15
Output 14
Output 13
Output 12
Output 11
Output 10
Output 9
Output 8
Output 7
Output 6
Output 5
Output 4
Output 3
Output 2
Output 1

3-70
3.3 I/O Module Cables

6) Connecting to 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block

For the combination of W0301 Cable and 32-point I/O connector Terminal Block

32-point I/O connector

Terminal Block

W0301 Cable

Connector 1 (Module side)

Connector 2 (external device side)

Shielded cable

Connecting to connector 2 of W0301 Cable

3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block

1) Use
(1) This terminal block is used to connect external devices to the Modules listed
below.
(a) 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400)
(b) 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410)
(2) Use this terminal block in combination with a W0301 Cable.
(3) Use the 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block manufactured by OMRON Cor-
poration (Model No. XW2B-40F5-P).

2) Approximate Specifications
The following table shows approximate specifications of an OMRON-manufactured
XW2B-40F5-P Terminal Block.

Table 3.6 Specifications of 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block XW2B-40F5-P

Item Specifications
Model No. XW2B-40F5-P
Connector FCN-364P040-AU (Fujitsu Ltd.)
External Connections Terminal block with M3.5 screw terminals
Structure Wall mounting
Approximate Mass 200 g
External Dimensions 216.5×45×43 mm (W×H×D)

3-71
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.5 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block

3) External Appearance
The following illustration shows the appearance of the OMRON-manufactured
XW2B-40F5-P Terminal Block.

4) Connecting to 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (Inputs)

The following table shows the signal names of wires when the W0301 Cable and
32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (OMRON: XW2B-40F5-P) are used to con-
nect the 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module.

Table 3.7 Terminal Numbers and Signal Names for the Terminal Block

Terminal No. Signal Name Terminal No. Signal Name

2 Input 2 1 Input 1
4 Input 4 3 Input 3
6 Input 6 5 Input 5
8 Input 8 7 Input 7
10 Input 10 9 Input 9
12 Input 12 11 Input 11
14 Input 14 13 Input 13
16 Input 16 15 Input 15
18 Common 1 17 Common 1
20 Not connected 19 Not connected
22 Input 18 21 Input 17
24 Input 20 23 Input 19
26 Input 22 25 Input 21
28 Input 24 27 Input 23
30 Input 26 29 Input 25
32 Input 28 31 Input 27
34 Input 30 33 Input 29
36 Input 32 35 Input 31
38 Common 2 37 Common 2
40 Not connected 39 Not connected

3-72
3.3 I/O Module Cables

5) Connecting to 32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (Outputs)

The following table shows the signal names of wires when the W0301 Cable and
32-point I/O Connector Terminal Block (OMRON: XW2B-40F5-P) are used to con-
nect the 12/24-VDC Output Module.

Table 3.8 Terminal Numbers and Signal Names for the Terminal Block

Terminal No. Signal Name Terminal No. Signal Name

2 Output 2 1 Output 1
4 Output 4 3 Output 3
6 Output 6 5 Output 5
8 Output 8 7 Output 7
10 Output 10 9 Output 9
12 Output 12 11 Output 11
14 Output 14 13 Output 13
16 Output 16 15 Output 15
3
18 -Common 1 17 -Common 1
20 +Common 1 19 +Common 1
22 Output 18 21 Output 17
24 Output 20 23 Output 19
26 Output 22 25 Output 21
28 Output 24 27 Output 23
30 Output 26 29 Output 25
32 Output 28 31 Output 27
34 Output 30 33 Output 29
36 Output 32 35 Output 31
38 -Common 2 37 -Common 2
40 +Common 2 39 +Common 2

3-73
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-)

3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-)

1) Use
(1) This Cable is used to connect external devices to the Modules listed below.
(a) 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400)
(b) 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410)
(c) Register Input Module (Model No. JAMSC-120RDI34410)
(d) Register Output Module (Model No. JAMSC-120RDO34410)
(2) The end of the Cable to the external device is loose wires.

2) Specifications
The following table shows specifications of W5410 Cables.

Table 3.9 Specifications of W5410 Cable

Item Specifications
Model Name W5410-05 W5410-10 W5410-30
Model No. JEPMC-W5410-05 JEPMC-W5410-10 JEPMC-W5410-30
Length L 0.5 m 1.0 m 3.0 m
Cable Shielded cable, 40 cores, AWG24 (0.20 mm 2)
Specifications
Cable Module Connector: FCN-363J-040 (Fujitsu Ltd.)
Termination side FCN-360C040-B (Fujitsu Ltd.)
FCN-363J-AU/R (Fujitsu Ltd.)
External Loose wires: Wire length 100 mm with pin number label on
device each wire.
side
Insulation 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between core wires
Resistance (connected together) and shielding wire, and between core wires
(measured with a 500-VDC test voltage megohmmeter).

3) Appearance
The following illustration shows the appearance of a W5410 Cable.

Connector (Module side) Loose wires (external device side)

A pin number label is on
Model name each loose wire.

Shield cable
40-core
loose wires

L 100 mm

3-74
3.3 I/O Module Cables

4) Connecting External Input Device with Cable W5410

The following table and diagram show the signal names for the wires when the
W5410 Cable connects the 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module to an external input
device. Connector pin numbers and dots are on each loose wire to identify the wire
number and signal name.

a) Module connector CN1 side

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN1) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Wire No.
Pin No. Not connected Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20
B20 A20 A20 Not connected Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 Common 2 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 Common 2 Orange red −−−− −−−−

B18 A18
B18
A18
Input 32
Input 31
Green
Green
black
red
−−−−
−−−−
−−−−
−−−−
3
B17 Input 30 Pink black −−−− −−−−
B17 A17 A17 Input 29 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 Input 28 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 Input 27 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 Input 26 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 Input 25 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 Input 24 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 Input 23 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 Input 22 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 Input 21 Green red −−− −−−
B12 Input 20 Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 Input 19 Pink red −−− −−−
B11 Input 18 Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 Input 17 Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 Not connected Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 Not connected Gray red −− −−
B9 Common 1 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 Common 1 Orange red −− −−
B8 Input 16 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 Input 15 Green red −− −−
B7 Input 14 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 Input 13 Pink red −− −−
B6 Input 12 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 Input 11 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 Input 10 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 Input 9 Gray red − −
B4 Input 8 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 Input 7 Orange red − −
B3 Input 6 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 Input 5 Green red − −
B2 Input 4 Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 Input 3 Pink red − −
B1 Input 2 Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 Input 1 Litght blue red − −

3-75
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-)

b) Module connector CN2 side

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN2) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable Wire No. Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Pin No.
B20 Not connected Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20 A20 A20 Not connected Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 Common 4 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 Common 4 Orange red −−−− −−−−
B18 Input 64 Green black −−−− −−−−
B18 A18 A18 Input 63 Green red −−−− −−−−
B17 Input 62 Pink black −−−− −−−−
B17 A17 A17 Input 61 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 Input 60 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 Input 59 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 Input 58 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 Input 57 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 Input 56 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 Input 55 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 Input 54 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 Input 53 Green red −−− −−−
B12 Input 52 Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 Input 51 Pink red −−− −−−
B11 Input 50 Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 Input 49 Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 Not connected Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 Not connected Gray red −− −−
B9 Common 3 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 Common 3 Orange red −− −−
B8 Input 48 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 Input 47 Green red −− −−
B7 Input 46 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 Input 45 Pink red −− −−
B6 Input 44 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 Input 43 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 Input 42 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 Input 41 Gray red − −
B4 Input 40 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 Input 39 Orange red − −
B3 Input 38 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 Input 37 Green red − −
B2 Input 36 Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 Input 35 Pink red − −
B1 Input 34 Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 Input 33 Litght blue red − −

3-76
3.3 I/O Module Cables

5) Connecting External Output Device with Cable W5410

The following table and diagram show the signal names for the wires when the
W5410 Cable connects the 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module to an external out-
put device. Connector pin numbers and dots are on each loose wire to identify the
wire number and signal name.

a) Module connector CN1 side

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN1) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Wire No.
Pin No. + Common 2 Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20
B20 A20 A20 + Common 2 Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 - Common 2 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 - Common 2 Orange red −−−− −−−−

B18 A18
B18
A18
Input 32
Input 31
Green
Green
black
red
−−−−
−−−−
−−−−
−−−−
3
B17 Input 30 Pink black −−−− −−−−
B17 A17 A17 Input 29 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 Input 28 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 Input 27 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 Input 26 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 Input 25 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 Input 24 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 Input 23 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 Input 22 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 Input 21 Green red −−− −−−
B12 Input 20 Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 Input 19 Pink red −−− −−−
B11 Input 18 Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 Input 17 Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 + Common 1 Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 + Common 1 Gray red −− −−
B9 - Common 1 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 - Common 1 Orange red −− −−
B8 Input 16 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 Input 15 Green red −− −−
B7 Input 14 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 Input 13 Pink red −− −−
B6 Input 12 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 Input 11 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 Input 10 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 Input 9 Gray red − −
B4 Input 8 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 Input 7 Orange red − −
B3 Input 6 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 Input 5 Green red − −
B2 Input 4 Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 Input 3 Pink red − −
B1 Input 2 Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 Input 1 Litght blue red − −

3-77
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-)

b) Module connector CN2 side

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN2) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Wire No. Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable
Pin No. + Common 4 Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20
B20 A20 A20 + Common 4 Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 - Common 4 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 - Common 4 Orange red −−−− −−−−
B18 Input 64 Green black −−−− −−−−
B18 A18 A18 Input 63 Green red −−−− −−−−
B17 Input 62 Pink black −−−− −−−−
B17 A17 A17 Input 61 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 Input 60 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 Input 59 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 Input 58 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 Input 57 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 Input 56 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 Input 55 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 Input 54 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 Input 53 Green red −−− −−−
B12 Input 52 Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 Input 51 Pink red −−− −−−
B11 Input 50 Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 Input 49 Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 + Common 3 Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 + Common 3 Gray red −− −−
B9 - Common 3 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 - Common 3 Orange red −− −−
B8 Input 48 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 Input 47 Green red −− −−
B7 Input 46 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 Input 45 Pink red −− −−
B6 Input 44 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 Input 43 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 Input 42 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 Input 41 Gray red − −
B4 Input 40 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 Input 39 Orange red − −
B3 Input 38 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 Input 37 Green red − −
B2 Input 36 Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 Input 35 Pink red − −
B1 Input 34 Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 Input 33 Litght blue red − −

3-78
3.3 I/O Module Cables

6) Connecting Register Input Modules with Cable W5410

The following table and diagram show the signal names for the wires when the
W5410 Cable connects the Register Input Module to an external input device. Con-
nector pin numbers and dots are on each loose wire to identify the wire number and
signal name.

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN1) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Wire No.
Pin No. DATA 1 Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20
B20 A20 A20 DATA 2 Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 DATA 3 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 DATA 4 Orange red −−−− −−−−
B18 DATA 5 Green black −−−− −−−−
B18 A18 A18 DATA 6 Green red −−−− −−−−
B17 DATA 7 Pink black −−−− −−−− 3
B17 A17 A17 DATA 8 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 DATA 9 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 DATA 10 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 DATA 11 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 DATA 12 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 DATA 13 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 DATA 14 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 DATA 15 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 DATA 16 Green red −−− −−−
B12 Not connected Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 Not connected Pink red −−− −−−
B11 +12/24 V Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 +12/24 V Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 SEL 1 Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 SEL 2 Gray red −− −−
B9 SEL 3 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 SEL 4 Orange red −− −−
B8 SEL 5 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 SEL 6 Green red −− −−
B7 SEL 7 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 SEL 8 Pink red −− −−
B6 SEL 9 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 SEL 10 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 SEL 11 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 SEL 12 Gray red − −
B4 SEL 13 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 SEL 14 Orange red − −
B3 SEL 15 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 SEL 16 Green red − −
B2 0V Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 0V Pink red − −
B1 +12/24 V Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 +12/24 V Litght blue red − −

3-79
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.3.6 W5410 Cables (Model No. JEPMC-W5410-)

7) Connecting Register Output Modules with Cable W5410

The following table and diagram show the signal names of wires when the W5410
Cable connects the Register Output Module to an external output device. Connec-
tor pin numbers and dots are on each loose wire to identify the wire number and sig-
nal name.

Connector on the Loose wire side

Module (CN1) side Signal Name Covering Dot Mark Dot: approx. 1mm
Shielded cable Color Color Space: approx. 1mm
Wire No.
Pin No. DATA 1 Gray black −−−− −−−−
B20
B20 A20 A20 DATA 2 Gray red −−−− −−−−
B19 DATA 3 Orange black −−−− −−−−
B19 A19 A19 DATA 4 Orange red −−−− −−−−
B18 DATA 5 Green black −−−− −−−−
B18 A18 A18 DATA 6 Green red −−−− −−−−
B17 DATA 7 Pink black −−−− −−−−
B17 A17 A17 DATA 8 Pink red −−−− −−−−
B16 DATA 9 Litght blue black −−−− −−−−
B16 A16 A16 DATA 10 Litght blue red −−−− −−−−
B15 DATA 11 Gray black −−− −−−
B15 A15 A15 DATA 12 Gray red −−− −−−
B14 DATA 13 Orange black −−− −−−
B14 A14 A14 DATA 14 Orange red −−− −−−
B13 DATA 15 Green black −−− −−−
B13 A13 A13 DATA 16 Green red −−− −−−
B12 0V Pink black −−− −−−
B12 A12 A12 0V Pink red −−− −−−
B11 +12/24 V Litght blue black −−− −−−
B11 A11 A11 +12/24 V Litght blue red −−− −−−
B10 SEL 1 Gray black −− −−
B10 A10 A10 SEL 2 Gray red −− −−
B9 SEL 3 Orange black −− −−
B9 A9 A9 SEL 4 Orange red −− −−
B8 SEL 5 Green black −− −−
B8 A8 A8 SEL 6 Green red −− −−
B7 SEL 7 Pink black −− −−
B7 A7 A7 SEL 8 Pink red −− −−
B6 SEL 9 Litght blue black −− −−
B6 A6 A6 SEL 10 Litght blue red −− −−
B5 SEL 11 Gray black − −
B5 A5 A5 SEL 12 Gray red − −
B4 SEL 13 Orange black − −
B4 A4 A4 SEL 14 Orange red − −
B3 SEL 15 Green black − −
B3 A3 A3 SEL 16 Green red − −
B2 0V Pink black − −
B2 A2 A2 0V Pink red − −
B1 +12/24 V Litght blue black − −
B1 A1 A1 +12/24 V Litght blue red − −

3-80
3.4 I/O Allocation

3.4 I/O Allocation

This section describes the methods used to allocate I/O to the 120-series Digital I/O
Modules.

3.4.1 16-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81

3.4.2 32-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
3.4.3 64-point Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
3.4.4 8-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92
3.4.5 16-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94
3.4.6 32-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
3.4.7 64-point Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101

3.4.1 16-point Input Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation 3

The relationship between I/O signal and I/O reference must be defined so that the
CPU Module can input signals from input devices and output signals to output
devices. The following settings are necessary to define this relationship for Digital
Input Modules.

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

Setting these items is performed in a process called I/O allocation. I/O allocation is
performed using the MEMOSOFT and the settings are recorded in the I/O allocation
tables stored in memory in the CPU Module.

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Input Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the last
11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DAI54300 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DAI54300.

3-81
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.1 16-point Input Modules

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Input Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Input Relays 100001 to 101024 100001 to 104096 16 points
Input Registers 300001 to 300512 300001 to 300512 One register

(c) When an input relay is set, the leading I/O reference number must satisfy the
following equation:
Leading reference number of I/O relay = 100001 + 16 n
where n = 0 to 63 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 255 for the CPU30
For example, 100001 can be set as the leading reference number, but
100002 cannot.

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both input relays and input registers.

(1) When 16-point input relays are allocated from 100001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it.

Input Relay MSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the
smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.
Input Relay LSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the larg-
est input number (input 16) on the Input Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.1 Allocation of Input Relays for details.

3-82
3.4 I/O Allocation

Terminal number MSB Setting LSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input signal Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
3
Fig. 3.1 Allocation of Input Relays
When allocating input relays, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When input relay allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

(2) When input register 300001 is allocated, the bit order can be set to either
“MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the illustration
below it.

Input Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the input register (300001) is allocated to the
smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.
Input Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the input register (300001) is allocated to the larg-
est input number (input 16) on the Input Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.2 Allocation of Input Registers for details.

Terminal number LSB Setting MSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input signals Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16

Fig. 3.2 Allocation of Input Registers

When allocating input registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When input register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the input register is
allocated to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

3-83
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.2 32-point Input Modules

b) Input Data Type

If an input register is set as the I/O reference number, data input can be set to binary
(BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

Two types of service scans are available: normal and high-speed. A service scan
is recommended when using the high-speed segment function. The I/O module is
activated before the ladder decoding of the high-speed segments. The I/Os that are
processed in synchronization with the high-speed scan are called High-speed Seg-
ment I/Os. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “NORMAL.”

3.4.2 32-point Input Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

The relationship between I/O signals and I/O references must be defined so that the
CPU Module can input signals from input devices and output signals to output
devices. The following settings are necessary to define this relationship for Digital
Input Modules.

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Input Module mounted in the slot is set as the module type. Only the last
11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DDI35400 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DDI35400.

3-84
3.4 I/O Allocation

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Input Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Input Relays 100001 to 101024 100001 to 104096 32 points
Input Registers 300001 to 300512 300001 to 300512 2 registers

(c) When an input relay is set, the leading I/O reference number must satisfy the
following equation:
Leading reference number of I/O relay = 100001 + 16 n
where n = 0 to 63 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 255 for the CPU30 3
For example, 100001 can be set as the leading reference number, but
100002 cannot.

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both input relays and input registers.

(1) When 32-point input relays are allocated from 100001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 input points.

Input Relay MSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the
smallest input number of the first 16 input points (input 1) on the Input
Module. The next input reference number (100017) is allocated to the
smallest input number of the second 16 input points (input 17) on the
Input Module.
Input Relay LSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the larg-
est input number of the first 16 input points (input 16) on the Input
Module. The next input reference number (100017) is allocated to the
largest input number of the second 16 input points (input 32) on the
Input Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.3 Allocation of Input Relays for details.

3-85
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.2 32-point Input Modules

Terminal number MSB Setting LSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3

Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
Input signals
Input 17
Input 18
Input 19

Input 30
Input 31
Input 32

Fig. 3.3 Allocation of Input Relays

When allocating input relays, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When input relay allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

(2) When two input registers beginning with input register 300001 are allocated,
the bit order can be set to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following
table and shown in the illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16
input points.

Input Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading input reference number (300001) is
allocated to the smallest input number of the first 16 input points
(input 1) on the Input Module. Bit 15 (MSB) of the second input
reference number (300002) is allocated to the smallest input num-
ber of the second 16 input points (input 17) on the Input Module.
Input Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading input reference number (300001) is
allocated to the largest input number of the first 16 input points
(input 16) on the Input Module. Bit 15 (MSB) of the second input
reference number (300002) is allocated to the largest input num-
ber of the second 16 input points (input 32) on the Input Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.4 Allocation of Input Registers for details.

3-86
3.4 I/O Allocation

Terminal number LSB Setting MSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3

Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
Input signals
Input 17
Input 18
Input 19

Input 30
Input 31
Input 32
3
Fig. 3.4 Allocation of Input Registers
When allocating input registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When input register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the input register is
allocated to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

b) Input Data Type

If an input register is set as the I/O reference number, data input can be set to binary
(BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

3.4.3 64-point Input Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

3-87
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.3 64-point Input Modules

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Input Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the last
11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DDI36400 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DDI36400.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Input Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Input Relays 100001 to 101024 100001 to 104096 64 points
Input Registers 300001 to 300512 300001 to 300512 4 registers

3-88
3.4 I/O Allocation

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both input relays and input registers.

(1) When 64-point input relays are allocated from 100001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 input points.

Input Relay MSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the
smallest input number (input 1) of the first 16 points on the Input Mod-
ule, and then the next input reference number (100017) is allocated to 3
the smallest input number (input 17) of the next 16 points.
Input Relay LSB Setting The leading input reference number (100001) is allocated to the larg-
est input number (input 16) of the first 16 points on the Input Module,
and then the next input reference number (100017) is allocated to the
largest input number (input 32) of the next 16 points.

Refer to Fig. 3.5 Allocation of Input Relays for details.

(2) When four input registers starting from 300001 are allocated, the bit order can
be set to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown
in the illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 input points.

Input Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading input register (300001) is allocated to
the smallest input number (input 1) of the first 16 points on the
Input Module, and then bit 15 (MSB) of the next input register
(300002) is allocated to the smallest input number (input 17) of
the next 16 points.
Input Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading input register (300001) is allocated to
the largest input number (input 16) on the Input Module, and then
the bit 15 (MSB) of the next input register (300002) is allocated to
the largest input number (input 32) of the next 16 points.

Refer to Fig. 3.6 Allocation of Input Registers for details.

3-89
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.3 64-point Input Modules

CN1 pin number MSB Setting LSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3

Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
Input signals
Input 17
Input 18
Input 19

Input 30
Input 31
Input 32

CN2 pin number

Input 33
Input 34
Input 35

Input 46
Input 47
Input 48
Input signals
Input 49
Input 50
Input 51

Input 62
Input 63
Input 64

Fig. 3.5 Allocation of Input Relays

When allocating input relays, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When input relay allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

3-90
3.4 I/O Allocation

CN1 pin number LSB Setting MSB Setting

Input 1
Input 2
Input 3

Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
Input signal
Input 17
Input 18
Input 19

Input 30
Input 31
Input 32
3
CN2 pin number
Input 33
Input 34
Input 35

Input 46
Input 47
Input 48
Input signals
Input 49
Input 50
Input 51

Input 62
Input 63
Input 64

Fig. 3.6 Allocation of Input Registers

When allocating input registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When input register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the input register is
allocated to the smallest input number (input 1) on the Input Module.

b) Input Data Type

If an input register is set as the I/O reference number, data input can be set to binary
(BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

Two types of service scans are available: normal and high-speed. A service scan
is recommended when using the high-speed segment function. The I/O Module is
activated before the ladder decoding of the high-speed segments. The I/Os that are
processed in synchronization with the high-speed scan are called High-speed Seg-
ment I/Os. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “NORMAL.”

3-91
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.4 8-point Output Modules

3.4.4 8-point Output Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DAO83000 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DAO83000.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Output Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set. Output coils can be allocated for the 8-point Output Modules.

Type of Output References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output coils 000001 to 001024 000001 to 004096 8 points

3-92
3.4 I/O Allocation

(c) When an output coil is set, the leading I/O reference number must satisfy the
following equation:
Leading reference number of I/O coil = 000001 + 8 n
where n = 0 to 127 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 511 for the CPU30
For example, 000001 can be set as the leading reference number, but
000002 cannot.
Note: Output registers cannot be allocated for the 8-point Output
Modules.

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
3
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocating from the reference number 000001 and
also from the reference number 000009.

The bit order can be set to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table
and shown in the illustration below it.

Output Coil MSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001 or 000009) is allocated
to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.
Output Coil LSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001 or 000009) is allocated
to the largest output number (output 8) on the Output Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.7 and Fig. 3.8 for details.

(1) When allocating the output coils to eight output points from 000001

MSB Setting LSB Setting Terminal number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4 Output signals
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8

Fig. 3.7 Allocation Output Coils from 000001

(2) When allocating the output coils to eight output points from 000009

MSB Setting LSB Setting Terminal number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output signals
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8

Fig. 3.8 Allocation Output Coils from 000009

3-93
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.5 16-point Output Modules

When allocating output coils, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When output coil allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

b) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

c) Timeout Output
The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either of the following settings is possible.

(1) Final Data: The data that existed just before the CPU Module stopped.
(2) Set Data: Preset data.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to SET DATA.

d) Timeout Output Data

The data that is output when the CPU Module stops (when set data is specified for
the timeout output) can be set. The data set here is an image of the PC reference
data. The data set here is converted and output in the order bits are set. The
MEMOSOFT is set by default to all zeros.

3.4.5 16-point Output Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

(1) Module Type

(2) I/O Reference Numbers
(3) I/O Data Format

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

3-94
3.4 I/O Allocation

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DAO84300 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DAO84300.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Output Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Output References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output coils 000001 to 001024 000001 to 004096 16 points
Output registers 400001 to 400512 400001 to 400512 1 register
3
(c) When an output coil is set, the leading I/O reference number must satisfy the
following equation:
Leading reference number of I/O coil = 000001 + 16 n
where n = 0 to 63 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 255 for the CPU30
For example, 000001 can be set as the leading reference number, but
000002 cannot.

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both output coils and output regis-
ters.

(1) When 16-point output coils are allocated from 000001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it.

Output Coil MSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.
Output Coil LSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
largest output number (output 16) on the Output Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.9 Allocation of Output Coils for details.

3-95
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.5 16-point Output Modules

MSB Setting LSB Setting Terminal number

(LSB) (MSB) Output 1

Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9 Output signals
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
(MSB) (LSB) Output 16

Fig. 3.9 Allocation of Output Coils

When allocating output coils, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When output coil allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

(2) When output register 400001 is allocated, the bit order can be set to either
“MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the illustration
below it.

Output Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the output register (400001) is allocated to the
smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.
Output Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the output register (400001) is allocated to the
largest output number (output 16) on the Output Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.10 Allocation Output Registers for details.

LSB Setting MSB Setting Terminal number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Output signals
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
Output 16

Fig. 3.10 Allocation Output Registers

When allocating output registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When output register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the output register is
allocated to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

3-96
3.4 I/O Allocation

b) Output Data Type

If an output register is set as the I/O reference number, data output can be set to
binary (BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

d) Timeout Output
The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either of the following settings is possible.

(1) Final Data: The data that existed just prior to stopping. 3
(2) Set Data: Preset data.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to SET DATA.

e) Timeout Output Data

3.4.6 32-point Output Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

3-97
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.6 32-point Output Modules

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DDO35410 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DDO35410.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Output Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Output References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output coils 000001 to 001024 000001 to 004096 32 points
Output registers 400001 to 400512 400001 to 400512 2 registers

(c) When an output coil is set, the leading I/O reference number must satisfy the
following equation:
Leading reference number of I/O coil = 000001 + 16 n
where n = 0 to 63 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 255 for the CPU30
For example, 000001 can be set as the leading reference number, but
000002 cannot.

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both output coils and output regis-
ters.

(1) When 32-point output coils are allocated from 000001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 output points.

Output Coil MSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
smallest output number of the first 16 output points (output 1) on the
Output Module. The next output reference number (000017) is allo-
cated to the smallest output number of the second 16 output points
(output 17) on the Output Module.
Output Coil LSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
largest output number of the first 16 output points (output 16) on the
Output Module. The next output reference number (000017) is allo-
cated to the largest output number of the second 16 output points
(output 32) on the Output Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.11 Allocation of Output Coils for details.

3-98
3.4 I/O Allocation

MSB Setting LSB Setting Terminal number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Output signals
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19

Output 30
Output 31
Output 32
3
Fig. 3.11 Allocation of Output Coils
When allocating output coils, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When output coil allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

(2) When two output registers beginning with output register 400001 are allocated,
the bit order can be set to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following
table and shown in the illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16
output points.

Output Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading output reference number (400001) is
allocated to the smallest output number of the first 16 output
points (output 1) on the Output Module. Bit 15 (MSB) of the sec-
ond output reference number (400002) is allocated to the small-
est output number of the second 16 output points (output 17) on
the Output Module.
Output Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading output reference number (400001) is
allocated to the largest output number of the first 16 output
points (output 16) on the Output Module. Bit 15 (MSB) of the
second output reference number (400002) is allocated to the
largest output number of the second 16 output points (output 32)
on the Output Module.

Refer to Fig. 3.12 Allocation of Output Registers for details.

3-99
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.6 32-point Output Modules

LSB Setting MSB Setting Terminal number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Output signals
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19

Output 30
Output 31
Output 32

Fig. 3.12 Allocation of Output Registers

When allocating output registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When output register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the output register is
allocated to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

b) Output Data Type

If an output register is set as the I/O reference number, data output can be set to
binary (BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

d) Timeout Output
The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either of the following settings is possible.

(1) Final Data: The data that existed just prior to stopping.
(2) Set Data: Preset data.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to SET DATA.

e) Timeout Output Data

3-100
3.4 I/O Allocation

3.4.7 64-point Output Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

(1) Module Type

(2) I/O Reference Numbers
(3) I/O Data Format

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120DDO36410 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120DDO36410.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

(a) The leading I/O reference number used by the Output Module is set.
(b) Any one of the I/O reference numbers and points listed in the following table
can be set.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Points/Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output coils 000001 to 001024 000001 to 004096 64 points
Output registers 400001 to 400512 400001 to 400512 4 registers

3-101
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.7 64-point Output Modules

4) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings because the default settings can be used
for most normal applications.

a) Bit Order
I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits. This is explained next for allocation of both output coils and output regis-
ters.

(1) When 64-point output coils are allocated from 000001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 input points.

Output Coil MSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
smallest output number (output 1) of the first 16 points on the Output
Module, and then the next output reference number (000017) is allo-
cated to the smallest output number (output 17) of the next 16 points.
Output Coil LSB Setting The leading output reference number (000001) is allocated to the
largest output number (output 16) of the first 16 points on the Output
Module, and then the next output reference number (000017) is allo-
cated to the largest output number (output 32) of the next 16 points.

Refer to Fig 2.13 Allocation of Output Coils for details.

(2) When four output registers are allocated from 400001, the bit order can be set
to either “MSB” or “LSB,” as described in the following table and shown in the
illustration below it. Allocation is performed in units of 16 input points.

Output Register LSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading output register (400001) is allo-
cated to the smallest output number (output 1) of the first 16
points on the Output Module, and then the bit 15 (MSB) of the
next output register (400002) is allocated to the smallest out-
put number (output 17) of the next 16 points.
Output Register MSB Setting Bit 15 (MSB) of the leading output register (400001) is allo-
cated to the largest output number (output 16) on the Output
Module, and then the bit 15 (MSB) of the next output register
(400002) is allocated to the largest input number (output 32) of
the next 16 points.

Refer to Fig. 3.14 Allocation of Output Registers for details.

3-102
3.4 I/O Allocation

MSB Setting LSB Setting CN1 pin number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Output signals
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19

Output 30
Output 31
Output 32
3
CN2 pin number

Output 33
Output 34
Output 35

Output 46
Output 47
Output 48
Output signals
Output 49
Output 50
Output 51

Output 62
Output 63
Output 64

Fig. 3.13 Allocation of Output Coils

When allocating output coils, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “MSB.”

IMPORTANT When output coil allocation is set to “MSB,” the leading reference number is allocated
to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

3-103
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.4.7 64-point Output Modules

LSB Setting MSB Setting CN1 pin number

Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Output signals
Output 17
Output 18
Output 19

Output 30
Output 31
Output 32

CN2 pin number

Output 33
Output 34
Output 35

Output 46
Output 47
Output 48
Output signals
Output 49
Output 50
Output 51

Output 62
Output 63
Output 64

Fig. 3.14 Allocation of Output Registers

When allocating output registers, the MEMOSOFT is set by default to “LSB.”

IMPORTANT When output register allocation is set to “LSB,” bit 15 (MSB) of the output register is
allocated to the smallest output number (output 1) on the Output Module.

b) Output Data Type

If an output register is set as the I/O reference number, data output can be set to
binary (BIN) or BCD. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “BIN.”

c) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

3-104
3.4 I/O Allocation

d) Timeout Output
The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either of the following settings is possible.

(1) Final Data: The data that existed just prior to stopping.
(2) Set Data: Preset data.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to SET DATA.

e) Timeout Output Data

3-105
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.1 MEMOSOFT Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules

3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

This section describes the I/O allocations (maps) using the MEMOSOFT.

3.5.1 MEMOSOFT Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - 3-106

3.5.2 Digital Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-107
3.5.3 Digital Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-108
3.5.4 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-109

3.5.1 MEMOSOFT Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules

The following MEMOSOFT versions are required to use 64-point I/O Modules in
MEMOCON GL120 or GL130.

CAUTION The following CPU Module, Remote I/O Receiver Module, and MEMOSOFT versions
are necessary to use 64-point I/O Modules.

Using an inappropriate version may cause failure and malfunction.

Table 3.10 Versions Supporting 64-point I/O Modules

Name Model Model No. Version Number Location of

Name Version Number
CPU Module CPU10 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(8 kW) 120CPU14200
CPU Module CPU20 DDSCR- B05 and later Module nameplate
(16 kW) 120CPU34100
CPU Module CPU21 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(16 kW) 120CPU34110
CPU Module CPU30 DDSCR- B05 and later Module nameplate
(32 kW) 120CPU54100
CPU Module CPU35 DDSCR- A01 and later Module nameplate
(40 kW) 120CPU154110
Remote I/O RIOR- JAMSC- A10 and later Module nameplate
Receiver COAX 120CRR13100
Module
MEMOSOFT FMSGL-AT3 1.21 and later In the middle at the
(for English bottom of the
DOS) MEMOSOFT star-
tup screen.
FMSGL-PP3E
(for P120
English version)

* The nameplate is on the right side of the Module.

3-106
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

3.5.2 Digital Input Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section provides information on the MEMOSOFT I/O Traffic Cop Screen and
the Parameter Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i.e., I/O Allocation) Screen

3
Fig. 3.15 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter the Digital Input Module type, for example, 120DAI54300.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Digital Input Module.

When the first reference number is input, the cursor will move to the field for the last
reference number and the last reference number will be displayed automatically,
indicating the reference number that can be input. Press Enter Key to accept the
value, or change it to the desired value, if required.

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

Fig. 3.16 Parameter Setting Screen

a) Data Type
If an input register is set as the I/O reference number, data input can be set to BIN
(binary) or BCD (binary coded decimal notation).

b) Bit Order (LSB/MSB)

I/Os can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bit.

c) Service Scan (Normal/High-Speed)

Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O data refresh cycle.

3-107
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.3 Digital Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

3.5.3 Digital Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section provides information on the MEMOSOFT I/O Traffic Cop Screen and
the Parameter Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i.e., I/O Allocation) Screen

Fig. 3.17 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter the Digital Output Module type, for example, 120DAO84300.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Digital Output Module.

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

(a
(b
(c
(d

Fig. 3.18 Parameter Setting Screen

a) Data Type
If an output register is set as the I/O reference number, data output can be set to
BIN (binary) or BCD (binary coded decimal notation).

b) Bit Order (LSB/MSB)

I/O can be processed by handling data either in ascending or descending order of
the bits.

3-108
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

c) Service Scan (Normal/High-Speed)

Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O data refresh cycle.

d) Timeout Output (Final Data/Set Data)

The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either “Final Data” or “Set Data” can be set.

e) Timeout Output Data

If “Set Data” is specified for d) Timeout Output, set the data output when the CPU
Module stops.

3.5.4 I/O Allocations

This section explains the operation method of I/O Allocation taking the example of
Digital Output Modules. The operation method for Digital Input Modules is the same 3
as for Analog Input Modules.

1) I/O Allocation Items

I/Os must be allocated to use the Digital Input and Output Modules. I/O allocations
are made using the MEMOSOFT and the results are recorded in the I/O allocation
tables stored in memory of the CPU Module.

The following items must be set for I/O allocations.

• Module Type

• I/O References

• Data Type (BIN/BCD)

• Bit Order (LSB/MSB)

• Service Scan (Normal/High-speed scan)

• Timeout Output (Final Data/Set Data)

Note: This item is to be set only for Digital Output Modules.

3-109
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.4 I/O Allocations

2) Setting the Module Type

Set the Module Type in the following procedure.

(1) Start the MEMOSOFT and select Online from the Mode Menu.

Fig. 3.19 Mode Selection: Online

I/O allocations cannot be performed while the CPU Module is in RUN status.
If necessary, stop the CPU Module. Refer to 6.1 PLC Operations in the
MEMOSOFT User’s Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.10) for the procedure
to stop the CPU Module.
(2) Press the F2 (Config) Key to access the PLC System Configuration Screen.

fx2

Fig. 3.20 PLC System Configuration Screen

(3) Select I/O Map from the Map Menu using the Cursor Keys and press the Enter
Key.

fx4

Fig. 3.21 Selecting the I/O Map

3-110
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(4) The I/O Map Screen will be displayed. Move the cursor to the slot to which the
allocations are to be made.

Fig. 3.22 I/O Map

If the Digital Output (or Input) Module is already mounted, the Module model 3
description will be displayed on the right.
(5) Press the Shift + ? Keys. A list of Module types will be displayed.
Move the cursor to 120DAO84300 and press the Enter Key to select the Digi-
tal Output Module.

Fig. 3.23 Module Selection

3) Setting I/O References

A screen to allocate I/O (I/O Traffic Cop Screen) will be displayed.

(1) Input the reference number of the first output coil:

Move the cursor to the field for the reference number of the first output coil and
input the reference number. Press the Enter Key.

Input 000017.

Fig. 3.24 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

3-111
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.4 I/O Allocations

The leading I/O reference number of output coil must satisfy the following
equation:
<For 16-point, 32-point, and 64-point Output Modules>
Leading reference number of output coil = 000001+16n
where n = 0 to 63 for the CPU 20 and
n = 0 to 255 for the CPU30
<For 8-point Output Modules>
Leading reference number of output coil = 000001+8n
where n = 0 to 127 for the CPU20 and
n = 0 to 511 for the CPU30
(2) When the reference number of the first output coil is input, the cursor will move
to the field for the reference number of the last output coil and the reference
number will be displayed automatically, indicating the reference number that
can be input. Press the Enter Key to accept the value or change it to the
desired value if necessary.

Fig. 3.25 Reference Number of First Output Coil

The last I/O reference number of output coil must satisfy the following equation:
<For 16-point, 32-point, and 64-point Output Modules>
Leading reference number of output coil = 000000+16n
where n = 1 to 63 for the CPU 20 and
n = 1 to 255 for the CPU30
<For 8-point Output Modules>
Leading reference number of output coil = 000000+8n
where n = 1 to 127 for the CPU20 and
n = 1 to 511 for the CPU30

3-112
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(3) The reference number of the last output coil will be displayed.

Fig. 3.26 Reference Number of Last Output Coil

(4) This completes the setting of I/O references.

INFO I/O references for the Digital Input Module can be set in the same way as the Digital
Output Module.
3
4) Setting the Data Type
Press the F4 (Zoom) Key to access to the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Mod-
ule Editor).

(1) Move the cursor to OUTPUT DATA TYPE and press the Enter Key to access
the mode setting.

Fig. 3.27 Parameter Setting Screen: Data Type

(2) A screen will appear so that the data type setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either BIN or BCD and press the Enter Key to select the
desired mode.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to BIN.

3-113
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.4 I/O Allocations

Fig. 3.28 Mode Selection

5) Setting the Bit Order

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to BIT ORDER and press the Enter Key to access the bit
order setting.

Fig. 3.29 Parameter Setting Screen: Bit Order

(2) A screen will appear so that the bit order setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either LSB or MSB and press the Enter Key to select the
desired bit order.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default as follows:
• Input relays and output coils: MSB

• Input registers and output registers: LSB

Fig. 3.30 Bit Order Selection

3-114
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

6) Setting the Service Scan

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to SERVICE SCAN and press the Enter Key to access the
service scan setting.

3
Fig. 3.31 Parameter Setting Screen: Service scan
(2) A screen will appear so that the service scan setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either NORMAL or HIGH and press the Enter Key to select
the desired scan service.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to NORMAL.

Fig. 3.32 Service Scan Selection

3-115
3 Digital I/O Specifications
3.5.4 I/O Allocations

7) Setting the Timeout Output (Only for Digital Output Modules)

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to TIMEOUT OUT and press the Enter Key to access the tim-
eout output setting.

Fig. 3.33 Parameter Setting Screen: Time out Output

(2) A screen will appear so that the timeout output setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either FINAL DATA or SET VALUE and press the Enter
Key to select the desired timeout output status. If FINAL DATA is selected, the
data just before the CPU Module entered STOP status will be sent for all out-
puts until the CPU Module returns to RUN status.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to SET VALUE.

Fig. 3.34 Timeout Output Status Selection

INFO The timeout output setting is only for Digital Output Modules, but not for Digital Input
Modules.

3-116
3.5 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

8) Setting the Timeout Output Data (Only for Digital Output Modules)
Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to the input field for SET VALUE and input a value. Then,
press the Enter Key.

Input 100
for example

3
Fig. 3.35 Parameter Setting Screen: Timeout Output Data
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 0.

Fig. 3.36 Timeout Output Data Setting

INFO The timeout output data setting is only for Digital Output Modules and not for Digital
Input Modules.

9) This completes the I/O allocations.

Press the F9 (Quit) Key to end the procedure.

3-117
Analog I/O Specifications

4
This chapter gives the specifications of Analog Input Modules and Ana-
log Output Modules.

4.1 Analog Input Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2

4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14 4
4.2 Analog Output Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels) 4-25
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30

4.3 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35

4.3.1 Analog Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35
4.3.2 Analog Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39

4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-41

4.4.1 Analog Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-41
4.4.2 Analog Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-42
4.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-43

4-1
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels)

4.1 Analog Input Specifications

This section describes performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections, and appearance of the 120-series Analog Input Modules.

4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2

4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14

4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Input Module (±10 V, 4 channels)
Model Name A/D-VOL-4CH
Model No. JAMSC-120AVI02000
Input Signal Range -10 to 10 V
Special Input None
Number of Input Channels 4 channels, isolated in common
Input Impedance 1 MΩ min
Maximum Allowable Overload -25 to 25 V
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format 1) Two modes available, set by allocation
0-4000 mode/±2000 mode
2) Range of numerical values for each mode is as follows:
0-4000 mode: Binary, 0 to +4000
±2000 mode: 2’s complement, -2000 to +2000
Errors ±0.5% F.S. (25 °C)
±1.0% F.S. (0 to 60 °C)
Input Delay Time 4 ms max.
Sampling Interval Input data is renewed for every scan by CPU
Input Filter Characteristics 3 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 5 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Functions Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status Indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal
ACT: Lights during input processing
ERR: Lights when overrange is detected
CH1 to CH4: The corresponding LED is lit when overrange is
detected for the channel.*
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between input terminals (con-
nected together) and internal circuits
No insulation between input channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
input terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current Consumption 450 mA max. at 5 VDC

4-2
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

Item Specification
Maximum Heating Value 2.3 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 300g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)
* Overrange is detected when +10.24 V < Channel input signal or
Channel input signal < -10.24 V
2) Input Characteristics
The following diagram show the input characteristics. Two modes are available:
±2000 mode and 0-4000 mode. The mode is selected by I/O allocation.

Analog input value Input register value

±2000 mode 0-4000 mode
≤-10.24 V -2048 0000
-10.00 V -2000 0000 4
-5.00 V -1000 1000
0.00 V 0000 2000
+5.00 V +1000 3000
+10.00 V +2000 4000
≥+10.24 V +2048 4048

Input register value

0-4000 mode

+2000 mode

Analog input value (V)

Note: (1) For ±2000 mode, if input register value exceeds the range
from -10.24 V to +10.24 V, the analog input value will be
clamped at -2048 or +2048.
(2) For 0-4000 mode, if input register value exceeds the range
from -10.00 V to +10.24 V, the analog input value will be
clamped at 0 or 4048.

4-3
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels)

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Differential signal source Multiplexer

Shield 1
-10 to 10 V

Differential signal source

Status
display

Photocoupler

Internal circuits
A/D converter
-10 to 10 V Shield 2

Single-ended signal source

CH3+

Shield 3
-10 to 10 V

Single-ended signal source

Insulated
DC/DC
Shield 4
-10 to 10 V converter

4700 pF

0 V (analog)

4-4
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

4) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
For Differential Signal Source
Not connected
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

CH1 V+

Shield 1

CH1 V-

-10 to 10 V
Not connected
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire
CH2 V+

Shield 2

CH2 V-

-10 to 10 V
For Single-ended Signal Source
Not connected
4
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire
CH3 V+

Shield 3

CH3 V-

-10 to 10 V
Not connected
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

CH4 V+

Shield 4

CH4 V-

-10 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected
FG
Grounding resistance Not connected
100 Ω max.

Note: (1) Isolation between Input Channels

There is no insolation provided between the input circuit channels. If isolation
between channels is required, use a commercial isolation amplifier for each
channel.
(2) Recommended Cables
Use shielded twisted-pair wires 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to con-
nect to the terminal block.

4-5
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.1 Analog Input Modules (±10 V, 4 channels)

(3) Connecting Differential Signal Sources

a) Connect + side of a differential signal to “V+” terminal of the Module.
b) Connect - side of a differential signal to “V-” terminal of the Module.
c) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the Module.
d) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire on the signal source side to 0 V of the differ-
ential signal source. An incorrect connection will make the input signal unstable and cause mal-
function.
(4) Connecting Single-ended Signal Sources
a) Connect + side of a single-ended signal to “V+” terminal of the Module.
b) Connect - side of a single-ended signal to “V-” terminal of the Module.
c) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the Module and short
“Shield” terminal to “V-” terminal. An incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and
cause malfunction.
(5) Unused Input Circuits
For a unused input circuit, short its “V+” terminal to “V-” terminal and also short
one of these terminals to its “Shield” terminal.
(6) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(7) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 18, and 20 are not connected.

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Input Module (±10 V, 4 CH). For
further details on I/O allocation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

4-6
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

6) External Appearance

Color code
(light green)
Module description (120AVI02000)
Removable terminal block Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert
LED area for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

External wiring terminal

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Color State Indication when ON

LED Area RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
120 AVI 020 00 Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
CH1 ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
CH2 Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
CH3 cessing error has occurred.
CH4 ERR Red Lit Overrange was detected at one of the chan-
nels, CH1 to CH4.
Flashing Parameter check sum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.
CH 1 to CH 4 Green Lit Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• +10.12 V < Input signal
• Input signal < -10.12 V
Flashing Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• +10.00 V < Input signal < +10.12 V.
• -10.24 V < Input signal < -10.00 V.

4-7
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels)

4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Input Module (0 to 10 V, 4 CH)
Model Name A/D 0-10 V 4CH
Model No. JAMSC-120AVI02100
Input Signal Range 0 to 10 V
Number of Input Channels 4 channels, isolated in common
Input Impedance 1 MΩ min
Maximum Allowable Overload -25 to 25 V
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format Binary: 0 to +4000
Error ±0.5% F.S. (25 °C)
±1.0% F.S. (0 to 60 °C)
Input Delay Time 4 ms max.
Sampling Interval Input data is renewed for every scan by CPU
Input Filter Characteristics 3 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 5 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Functions Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status Indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal
ACT: Lights during input processing
ERR: Lights when overrange is detected
CH1 to CH4: The corresponding LED is lit when overrange is
detected for the channel.
Overrange: +10.12 V < channel input signal
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between input terminals (con-
nected together) and internal circuits
No insulation between input channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
input terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current Consumption 450 mA max. at 5 VDC
Maximum Heating Value 2.3 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)

4-8
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

2) Input Characteristics
The following diagram show the input characteristics.

Analog Input Value Input Register Value

≤0.00 V 0000
2.50 V 1000
5.00 V 2000
7.50 V 3000
10.00 V 4000
≥10.12 V 4048

Input register value

0-4000 mode

Analog input value (V)

Note: Input values exceeding the range of 0.00 V to 10.12 V will be
clamped at 0 or 4048.

4-9
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels)

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Differential signal source Multiplexer

0 to 10 V Shield 1

Differential signal source

Status
display

Photocoupler

Internal circuits
A/D converter
0 to 10 V Shield 2

Differential signal source

0 to 10 V Shield 3

Differential signal source

Insulated
DC/DC
0 to 10 V Shield 4 converter

0 V (analog)

4-10
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

4) The following diagram shows an example of terminal connections.

External device Shielded twisted-pair wire Not connected

EXAMPLE

Shield 1

0 to 10 V

External device Shielded twisted-pair wire Not connected

Shield 2
0

0 to 10 V

Not connected
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

4
Shield 3
0

0 to 10 V

Not connected
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

Shield 4
0

0 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected

Grounding resistance
100 Ω or max.
Note: (1) Isolation between Input Channels
There is no isolation provided between the input circuit channels. If isolation
between channels is required, use a commercial isolation amplifier for each
channel.
(2) Recommended Wires
Use shielded twisted-pair wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to
connect to the terminal block.
(3) Connecting Single-ended Signal Sources
a) Connect + side of a single-ended signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
b) Connect - side of a single-ended signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
c) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the Module and short
“Shield” terminal to “V-” terminal. An incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and
cause malfunction.

4-11
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.2 Analog Input Modules (0 to 10 V, 4 channels)

(4) Unused Input Circuits

For a unused input circuit, short its “+” terminal to “-” terminal and also short one
of these terminals to its “Shield” terminal. An incorrect connection will make
input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
(5) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(6) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 18, and 20 are not connected.

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Input Module (±10 V, 4 CH). For
further details on I/O allocation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

4-12
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

6) External Appearance

Module description (120AVI02100)

Color code Removable terminal block

(light green) for field connections Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert

LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Terminal block mounting screw

Field wiring terminal (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Color State Indication when ON

LED Area RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
120 AVI 021 00 Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
CH1 ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
CH2 Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
CH3 cessing error has occurred.
CH4
ERR Red Lit Overrange was detected at one of the chan-
nels, CH1 to CH4.
Flashing Parameter check sum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.
CH 1 to CH 4 Green Lit Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• +10.12 V < Input signal
Flashing Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• +10.00 V < Input signal < +10.12 V.

4-13
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels)

4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Input Module (4 to 20-mA, 4 CH)
Model Name A/D-CUR-4CH
Model No. JAMSC-120AC102000
input Signal Range Using either Current Input or Voltage Input by changing ter-
minal connections.
1) Current Input: 4 to 20 mA
2) Voltage Input: 1 to 5 V
Special Input None
Number of Input Channels 4 channels, isolated in common
Input Impedance Current Input: 250 Ω
Voltage Input: 1 MΩ min.
Maximum Allowable Overload Current Input: -100 to +100 mA
Voltage Input: -25 to +25 V
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format Binary, 0 to 4000
Errors ±0.5% F.S. (25 °C)
±1.0% F.S. (0 to 60 °C)
Input Delay Time 4 ms max.
Sampling Interval Input data are renewed for every scan by CPU
Input Filter Characteristics 3 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 5 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Functions Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status Indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal
ACT: Lights during input processing
ERR: Lights when an overrange is detected
CH1 to CH4: The corresponding LED is lit when an over-
range is detected for the channel.*
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between input terminals (con-
nected together) and internal circuits.
No insulation between input channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. an room temperature and humidity between
input terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current Consumption 450 max. at 5 VDC
Maximum Heating Value 2.3 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2(AWG20)
* Overrange is detected when 20.48 mA < Channel input signal or
Channel input signal < 2.0 mA

4-14
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

2) Input Characteristics
The following diagram shows the input characteristics.

Analog input value Input register value

≤4.00 mA (1.00 V) 0000
8.00 mA (2.00 V) 1000
12.00 mA (3.00 V) 2000
16.00 mA (4.00 V) 3000
20.00 mA (5.00 V) 4000
≥20.48 mA (5.12 V) 4120

Input register value

Analog input value (mA)

Note: If input register value exceeds the range from 4 mA to 20.48 mA, the
analog input value will be clamped at 0 or 4120.

4-15
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels)

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Current signal source Multiplexer

4 to 20 mA Shield 1

Current signal source

+5 V
Status
indication

Internal circuits
Photocoupler

A/D converter
Shield 2
4 to 20 mA

Voltage signal source

Shield 3
1 to 5 V

Voltage signal source

+5 V

+15 V Insulated
-15 V DC/DC
Shield 4 converter
1 to 5 V

4700 pF
0 V (analog) 0V

4-16
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

4) The following diagram shows an example for terminal connections.

For Current Signal Source

External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

1 CH1 S
EXAMPLE
+ 2 CH1 +

A 3 Shield 1
-
4 CH1 -

4 to 20 mA

External device Shielded twisted-pair wire CH2 S

6 CH2 +
+
A 7 Shield 2
-
8 CH2 -

4 to 20 mA
For Voltage Signal Source
4
External device Shielded twisted-pair wire 9 CH3 S

10 CH3 +
+
V 11 Shield 3
- CH3 -
12

1 to 5 V

External device Shielded twisted-pair wire

13 CH4 S

+ 14 CH4 +

V 15 Shield 4
-
16 CH4 -

1 to 5 V

17 Not connected

18 Not connected

19 FG

20 Not connected

Grounding resistance
100 Ω max.
Note: (1) Isolation between Input Channels
There is no insolation provided between the input circuit channels. If isolation
between channels is required, use a commercial isolation amplifier for each
channel.
(2) Recommended Cables
Use shielded twisted-pair wire 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to con-
nect to the terminal block.

4-17
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.1.3 Analog Input Modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels)

(3) Connecting Current Signal Sources

a) Connect + side of a current signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
b) Connect - side of a current signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
c) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the Module and short
“Shield” terminal, “S” terminal, and “-” terminal. An incorrect connection will make the input sig-
nal unstable and cause malfunction.
(4) Connecting Voltage Signal Sources
a) Connect + side of a voltage signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
b) Connect - side of a voltage signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
c) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the Module, and short
the “Shield” terminal to “-” terminal.
d) Leave the “S” terminal open, or the input signal will become unstable and cause malfunction.
(5) Unused Input Circuits
Unused inputs have the “S” terminal shorted to the “+” terminal and to the “-” terminal, as well,
one of these terminals must be shorted to the appropriate “Shield” terminal.
(6) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(7) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 17, 18, and 20 are not connected.

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Input Module (4 to 20-mA, 4
channels). For further details on I/O allocation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

4-18
4.1 Analog Input Specifications

6) External Appearance

Color code
(light green)
Module description (120ACI02000)
Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert
Removable terminal block
LED area
for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

External wiring terminal

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Color State Indication when ON

LED Area RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
120 ACI 021 00 Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
CH1 ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
CH2 Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
CH3 cessing error has occurred.
CH4
ERR Red Lit Overrange is detected at one of the channels,
CH1 to CH4.
Flashing Parameter check sum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.
CH 1 to CH 4 Green Lit Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• 20.48 mA < Input signal
• Input signal < 2.0 mA
Flashing Input signal of indicated channel exceeds the
input signal range shown below.
• 20.0 mA < Input signal < 20.48 mA.
• 2.0 mA < Input signal < 4.0 mA.

4-19
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels)

4.2 Analog Output Specifications

This section describes the performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections and appearance of the 120-series Analog Output Modules.

4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20

4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels) 4-25
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30

4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Output Module (±10 V, 2 channels)
Model Name D/A-VOL-2CH
Model No. JAMSC-120AVO01000
Output Signal Range -10 to +10 V
Number of Output Channels 2 channels, isolated individually
Maximum Allowable Load Current ±5 mA (2 kΩ)
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format 1) Two modes available, set by allocation
0-4000 mode/±2000 mode
2) Range of numerical values for each mode is as follows:
0-4000 mode: Binary, 0 to 4000
±2000 mode: 2’s complement, -2000 to +2000
Errors ±0.2 % F.S. (25 °C)
±0.5 % F.S. (0 to 60 °C)
Output Delay Time 5 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 2 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Functions Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
Maximum voltage at abnormal output: ±12 V limit
Outputs when CPU stops Select one of the following modes by I/O allocation
1) Outputs open
2) Maintains output data just before the CPU stopped
3) Outputs user set value
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status Indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal
ACT: Lights during output processing
ERR: Lights when Module is abnormal
Insulation Method Pulse transformer
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between output terminals (con-
nected together) and internal circuits
1,500 VAC for one minute between channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current Consumption 400 max. at 5 VDC
Maximum Heating Value 2.0 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)

4-20
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

Item Specification
Approximate Mass 350 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)

2) Output Characteristics
The following diagram show the output characteristics. Two modes are available:
±2000 mode and 0-4000 mode. The mode is selected by I/O allocation.

Output register value Analog output value

±2000 mode 0-4000 mode
≤-2000 -10.00 V -10.00 V
-1000 -5.00 V -10.00 V
0000 0.00 V -10.00 V
+1000 +5.00 V -5.00 V
+2000 +10.00 V 0.00 V
+3000 +10.00 V +5.00 V
4
≥+4000 +10.00 V +10.00 V

Analog output value(V)

-2000 -1000 0 1000 2000

-5
Output register value

-10
+2000 mode

Analog output value(V)

0 1000 2000 3000 4000

-5
Output register value

-10
0-4000 mode
Note: (1) For ±2000 mode, if output register value exceeds the range from
-2000 to +2000, the analog output value will be clamped at -
10.00 or +10.00 V.
(2) For 0-4000 mode, if output register value exceeds the range from
0 to 4000, the analog output value will be clamped at -10.00 or
+10.00 V.

4-21
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels)

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

+5 V

Status display

Isolation amplifier

Internal circuits
Load
From CPU D/A CH1 +
converter

CH1 -

-15 V
0 V (analog)
+5 V

Insulated +15 V CH2 +

DC/DC
-15 V
converter

CH2 -
0V 0 V (analog)

See Note.

The above circuit configuration is for Modules with a version number of

VER. C or later.

Note: Field Wiring Terminal 19

Connections to field wiring terminal 19 depended on the version of the Module. Be
sure to connect terminal 19 correctly according to the version.

• If the Module is VER. B, terminal 19 is not connected to anything internally.

• If the Module is VER. C or later, terminal 19 is connected through the Module to the Mount-
ing Base. It can thus be used to connect the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire when ground-
ing at the Module.

The version number of the Module is written on the nameplate on the right side of the Module.

4-22
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

4) The following diagram shows an example for terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH1 +

Not connected

CH1 -
-10 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected 4
Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH2 +

Not connected

CH2 -
-10 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected

Note: (1) All the channels of the output circuit are isolated each other.
(2) Recommended Cables
Use shielded twisted-pair wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to
connect to the terminal block.
(3) One-point Shield Connection
As a rule, connect the shield at one point on the load side. However, better out-
put characteristics may be obtained by connecting it at one point on the Module
side rather than on the load side, so consider which way is better depending on
the actual situation. An incorrect connection will make output signal unstable
and cause malfunction.
(4) Grounding the Module
The “Not connected” terminals of the Module are not connected inside the Mod-
ule. Use them as relay terminals, if necessary.
(5) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(6) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 1 to 5, 7, 9 to 13, 15, and 17 to 20 are not connected.

4-23
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.1 Analog Output Modules (±10 V, 2 channels)

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Output Module (±10 V, 4 chan-
nels). For further details on I/O allocation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

6) External Appearance

Color code
(dark green)
Module description (120AVO01000)

Removable terminal block Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert

LED area for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area LED Color State Indication when ON

120 AVO 010 00 RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
cessing error has occurred.
ERR Red Flashing Parameter checksum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.

4-24
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels)

(0 to 5 V, 2 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Output Module Analog Output Module
(0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels)
Model Name D/A 0-10 V 2CH D/A 0-5 V 2CH
Model No. JAMSC-120AVO01100 JAMSC-120AVO01200
Output Signal Range 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V
Maximum Allowable Load 5 mA (2 kΩ) 2.5 mA (2 kΩ)
Current
Number of Output 2 channels, isolated individually
Channels
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format Binary: 0 to +4000
Error ±0.2 % F.S. (25 °C)
±0.5 % F.S. (0 to 60 °C) 4
Maximum Instantaneous ±1.0 % (25 °C) when static noise of 400 V is applied
Noise Error
Output Delay Time 5 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 2 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
Functions Maximum voltage for abnormal output: ±12 V limit
Outputs when CPU Stops Select one of the following modes by I/O allocation
1) Open outputs
2) Maintains output data just before the CPU stopped.
3) Outputs user set value.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status Indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal.
ACT: Lights during output processing.
ERR: Lights when parameter checksum error occurs.
Insulation Method Pulse transformer
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between output terminals (connected
together) and internal circuits
1500VAC for one minute between channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between output
terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test voltage
megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current 400 mA max. at 5 VDC
Consumption
Maximum Heating Value 2.0 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
Approximate Mass 350 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)

4-25
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels)

2) Output Characteristics

The following diagram shows the output characteristics.

Output register value Analog output value

±2000 mode 0-4000 mode
≤0000 0.00 V 0.00 V
+1000 +2.50 V +1.25 V
+2000 +5.00 V +2.50 V
+3000 +7.50 V +3.75 V
≥+4000 +10.00 V +5.00 V

a) Output characteristics for 0 to 10 V, 2CH

Analog output value(V)

Output register value

b) Output characteristics for 0 to 5 V, 2CH

Analog output value(V)

Output register value

Note: (1) For 0 to 10 V (2 channels), an output register value exceeding
the range of 0 to 4000 will be clamped at 0 or 10.0 V.
(2) For 0 to 5 V (2 channels), an output register value exceeding the
range of 0 to 4000 will be clamped at 0 or 5.0 V.

4-26
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Status display

Isolation amplifier

Internal circuit
Load
From CPU D/A
converter

0 V (analog)

Insulated

4
DC/DC
converter

0 V (analog)

4-27
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.2 Analog Output Modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) (0 to 5 V, 2 channels)

4) The following diagram shows an example for terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH1 +

Not connected

CH1 -
0 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH2 +

Not connected

CH2 -
0 to 10 V
Not connected

Not connected

Note: (1) Isolation between Output Channels

All the channels of the output circuit are isolated each other.
(2) Recommended Cables
Use shielded twisted-pair wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to
connect to the terminal block.
(3) One-point Shield Connection
As a rule, connect the shield at one point on the load side. However, better out-
put characteristics may be obtained by connecting it at one point on the Module
side rather than on the load side, so consider which way is better depending on
the actual situation. An incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and
cause malfunction.
(4) Grounding the Module
The FG terminal of the Module is connected to the Mounting Base via the Mod-
ule. When grounding on the Module side, use the FG terminal. The “Not con-
nected” terminals are not connected inside the Module. Use them as relay
terminals.
(5) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(6) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 1 to 5, 7, 9 to 13, 15, 17, 18 and 20 are not connected.

4-28
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Output Module (±10 V, 4 chan-
nels) or Analog Output Module (0 to 5 V, 2 channels). For further details on I/O allo-
cation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

6) External Appearance
The appearance and configuration of the Analog Output Module (0 to 10 V, 2 chan-
nels) are shown below. The appearance and configuration of the Analog Output
Module (0 to 5 V, 2CH) are the same as the following illustration except for the
model description.

Module description
(120AVO01100)

Removable terminal block

Color code Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert
(dark green)
for field connections
4
LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

Terminal block mounting screw

(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area LED Color State Indication when ON

120 AVO 011 00 RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
cessing error has occurred.
ERR Red Flashing Parameter checksum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.

4-29
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels)

4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels)

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specification
Name Analog Output Module (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels)
Model Name D/A-CUR-2CH
Model No. JAMSC-120ACO01000
Output Signal Range 4 to 20 mA
Number of Output Channels 2 channels, isolated individually
Maximum Allowable Load Resis- 550 Ω
tance
Digital Resolution 12 bits
Data Format Binary, 0 to +4000
Errors ±0.2 % F.S. (25 °C)
±0.5 % F.S. (0 to 60 °C)
Output Delay Time 5 ms max.
Number of Allocated Words 2 words/Module
Maintenance/Diagnosis Functions Watchdog timer (timeout: 262 ms)
Outputs when CPU Stops Select one of the following modes by I/O allocation
1) Outputs open
2) Maintains output data just before the CPU stopped.
3) Outputs user set value.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Status indication RDY: Lights when Module is normal
ACT: Lights during output processing
ERR: Lights when Module is abnormal
Insulation Method Pulse transformer
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for one minute between output terminals (con-
nected together) and internal circuits
1,500 VAC for one minute between output channels
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between
output terminals and ground (measured with a 500-VDC test
voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply Not needed
Internal Current Consumption 500 mA max. at 5 VDC
Maximum Heating Value 2.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approximate Mass 350 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)
Recommended Cable Shielded twisted-pair wires
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)

4-30
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

2) Output Characteristics
The following diagram show the output characteristics.

Output register value Analog output value

≤0000 4.00 mA
1000 8.00 mA
2000 12.00 mA
3000 16.00 mA
≥4000 20.00 mA

Analog output value (mA) 4

0 1000 2000 3000 4000

Output register value

Note: If output register value exceeds the range from 0 to +4000, the ana-
log output value will be clamped at 4 mA or 20 mA.

4-31
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels)

3) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

+5 V

Status display +15 V

Isolation amplifier

Internal circuits
Load
From CPU D/A CH1 +
converter

CH1 -

-15 V
0 V (analog)

+5 V

Insulated +15 V
CH2 +
DC/DC -15 V
converter

CH2 -
0V 0 V (analog)

See Note.

The above circuit configuration is for Modules with a version number of VER.
C or later.

Note: Field Wiring Terminal 19

Connections to field wiring terminal 19 depended on the version of the Module. Be sure to connect
terminal 19 correctly according to the version.

• If the Module is VER. B, terminal 19 is not connected to anything internally.

The version number of the Module is written on the nameplate on the right side of the Module.

4-32
4.2 Analog Output Specifications

4) The following diagram shows an example for terminal connections.

EXAMPLE
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH1 +

Not connected

CH1 -
4 to 20mA
Not connected

Not connected

Not connected
4
Not connected Shielded twisted-pair wire External device

CH2 +

Not connected

CH2 -
4 to 20mA
Not connected

Not connected

Note: (1) All the channels of the output circuit are isolated each other.
(2) Recommended Cables
Use shielded twisted-pair wires of 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) to 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to
connect to the terminal block.
(3) One-point Shield Connection
As a rule, connect the shield at one point on the load side. However, better out-
put characteristics may be obtained by connecting it at one point on the Module
side rather than on the load side, so consider which way is better depending on
the actual situation. An incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and
cause malfunction.
(4) Grounding the Module
The “Not connected” terminals of the Module are not connected inside the Mod-
ule. Use them as relay terminals, if necessary.
(5) Crimp Terminals
Use M3 terminals for crimping to the terminal block.
(6) Unconnected Terminals
Terminals 1 to 5, 7, 9 to 13, 15 and 17 to 20 are not connected.

4-33
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.2.3 Analog Output Modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels)

5) I/O Allocation
I/O allocation is necessary when using the Analog Output Module (4 to 20-mA, 2
channels). For further details on I/O allocation, refer to 4.3 I/O Allocation.

6) External Appearance

Color code
(dark green) Module description (120ACO01000)
Hinged terminal cover Signal label insert
LED area Removable terminal block
for field connections

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)
Field wiring terminal
Terminal block mounting screw
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area LED Color State Indication when ON

120 ACO 010 00 RDY Green Lit Module is normal.
Flashing Initial check error has occurred.
RDY ACT ERR
Not lit WDT timeout error has occurred.
ACT Green Lit Module is processing I/O.
Not lit CPU Module is in the STOP state or I/O pro-
cessing error has occurred.
ERR Red Flashing Parameter checksum error has occurred.
Not lit Module is normal.

4-34
4.3 I/O Allocation

4.3 I/O Allocation

This section describes I/O allocation for the 120-series Analog I/O Modules.

4.3.1 Analog Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35

4.3.2 Analog Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39

4.3.1 Analog Input Modules

1) I/O Allocation
The relationship between I/O signals and I/O references must be defined so that the
CPU Module can input signals from input devices and output signals to output
devices. The following settings are necessary to define this relationship for Analog
Input Modules.

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

4
Setting these items is performed in a process called I/O allocation. I/O allocation is
performed using MEMOSOFT and the settings are recorded in the I/O allocation
tables stored in memory in the CPU Module.

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

a) Module Type Setting

The type of Input Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the last
11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120AVI02000 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120AVI02000.

b) I/O Reference Number Setting

(1) The leading I/O reference number used by the Input Module is set.
(2) Five continuous I/O registers are allocated. The I/O reference numbers and
points that can be allocated are listed in the following table.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Number of

Registers
CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Input registers 300001 to 300512 300001 to 300512 5 registers

4-35
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.3.1 Analog Input Modules

(3) The five input registers that are allocated are used as shown in the following
table. Here, n is between 0 and 507.

Input Register Application

Reference Number
300001 + n Analog input signal for channel 1
300002 + n Analog input signal for channel 2
300003 + n Analog input signal for channel 3
300004 + n Analog input signal for channel 4
300005 + n Analog input signal status for channels 1 to 4. Refer to d)
Input Signal Status for details.

c) I/O Data Format

The following items can be set to define the I/O data format. There is, however, gen-
erally no need to change these settings, except for the mode setting, because the
default settings can be used for most normal applications.

(1) Mode Setting

(a) Analog Input Module (±10V, 4 CH)
The data format can be set to either of the following formats.
• ±2000 mode: ±10 V / -2000 to +2000

• 0 to 4000 mode: ±10 V / 0 to 4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the ±2000 mode.

(b) Analog Input Module (0-10V, 4 CH)
Only the 0 to 4000 mode can be used as the data format.
• 0 to 4000 mode: 0 to 10 V / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the 0 to 4000 mode.

(c) Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 4 CH)
Only the 0 to 4000 mode can be used as the data format.
• 0 to 4000 mode: 4 to 20 mA / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the 0 to 4000 mode.

(2) Software Filter Setting
Software filters can be set. The following three settings are available.
• No filter: The input signal read by the Module is input by the CPU Module
at each scan.

• 3 input average: The average of three input signals read by the Module is
input by the CPU Module at each scan.

• 5 input average: The average of five input signals read by the Module is
input by the CPU Module at each scan.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to use no filter.

Note: (1) The sampling interval for signals read by Input Modules is 4 ms.
(2) The data read by the CPU Module each scan is the most recent
signal or average read by the Input Module.

4-36
4.3 I/O Allocation

(3) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed

d) Input Signal Status

Error signals are generated by the Analog Input Module when an input signal
exceeds the input signal range.

(1) Analog Input Module (±10 V, 4 channels)

Input Register Application

300005 + n Analog input signal status for channels 1 to 4
Bit 15 1 when +10.24 V < channel 4 input signal
Bit 14 1 when +10.24 V < channel 3 input signal
Bit 13 1 when +10.24 V < channel 2 input signal
Bit 12 1 when +10.24 V < channel 1 input signal 4
Bit 11 1 when +10.0 V < channel 4 input signal < +10.24 V
Bit 10 1 when +10.0 V < channel 3 input signal < +10.24 V
Bit 9 1 when +10.0 V < channel 2 input signal < +10.24 V
Bit 8 1 when +10.0 V < channel 1 input signal < +10.24 V
Bit 7 1 when -10.24 V < channel 4 input signal < -10.0 V
Bit 6 1 when -10.24 V < channel 3 input signal < -10.0 V
Bit 5 1 when -10.24 V < channel 2 input signal < -10.0 V
Bit 4 1 when -10.24 V < channel 1 input signal < -10.0 V
Bit 3 1 when channel 4 input signal < -10.24 V
Bit 2 1 when channel 3 input signal < -10.24 V
Bit 1 1 when channel 2 input signal < -10.24 V
Bit 0 1 when channel 1 input signal < -10.24 V

4-37
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.3.1 Analog Input Modules

(2) Analog Input Module (0 to10 V, 4 channels)

Input Register Application

300005 + n Analog input signal status for channels 1 to 4
Bit 15 1 when +10.12 V < channel 4 input signal
Bit 14 1 when +10.12 V < channel 3 input signal
Bit 13 1 when +10.12 V < channel 2 input signal
Bit 12 1 when +10.12 V < channel 1 input signal
Bit 11 1 when +10.0 V < channel 4 input signal < +10.12 V
Bit 10 1 when +10.0 V < channel 3 input signal < +10.12 V
Bit 9 1 when +10.0 V < channel 2 input signal < +10.12 V
Bit 8 1 when +10.0 V < channel 1 input signal < +10.12 V
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

(3) Analog Input Module (4 to 20 mA, 4 channels)

Input Register Application

300005 + n Analog input signal status for channels 1 to 4
Bit 15 1 when 20.48 mA < channel 4 input signal
Bit 14 1 when 20.48 mA < channel 3 input signal
Bit 13 1 when 20.48 mA < channel 2 input signal
Bit 12 1 when 20.48 mA < channel 1 input signal
Bit 11 1 when 20.0 mA < channel 4 input signal < 20.48 mA
Bit 10 1 when 20.0 mA < channel 3 input signal < 20.48 mA
Bit 9 1 when 20.0 mA < channel 2 input signal < 20.48 mA
Bit 8 1 when 20.0 mA < channel 1 input signal < 20.48 mA
Bit 7 1 when 2.0 mA < channel 4 input signal < 4.0 mA
Bit 6 1 when 2.0 mA < channel 3 input signal < 4.0 mA
Bit 5 1 when 2.0 mA < channel 2 input signal < 4.0 mA
Bit 4 1 when 2.0 mA < channel 1 input signal < 4.0 mA
Bit 3 1 when channel 4 input signal < 2.0 mA
Bit 2 1 when channel 3 input signal < 2.0 mA
Bit 1 1 when channel 2 input signal < 2.0 mA
Bit 0 1 when channel 1 input signal < 2.0 mA

4-38
4.3 I/O Allocation

4.3.2 Analog Output Modules

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

• I/O Data Format

Refer to the following manuals for specific setting procedures.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.
4
• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10), Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25), Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

a) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example
120AVO01000 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120AVO01000.

b) I/O Reference Number Setting

(1) The leading I/O reference number used by the Output Module is set.
(2) Two continuous output registers are allocated. The I/O reference numbers and
points that can be allocated are listed in the following table.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Number of

Registers
CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output registers 400001 to 400512 400001 to 400512 2 registers

(3) The two output registers that are allocated are used as shown in the following
table. Here, n is between 0 and 510.

Output Register Application

Reference Number
400001 + n Analog output signal for channel 1
400002 + n Analog output signal for channel 2

4-39
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.3.2 Analog Output Modules

c) I/O Data Format

(1) Mode Setting

(a) Analog Output Module (±10 V, 4 channels)
The data format can be set to either of the following formats.
• ±2000 mode: ±10 V / -2000 to +2000

• 0 to 4000 mode: ±10 V / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the ±2000 mode.

(b) Analog Output Module (0 -10 V, 4 channels)
Only the 0 to 4000 mode can be used as the data format.
• 0 to 4000 mode: 0 to 10 V / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the 0 to 4000 mode.

(c) Analog Output Module (0 -5 V, 4 channels)
Only the 0 to 4000 mode can be used as the data format.
• 0 to 4000 mode: 0 to 5 V / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the 0 to 4000 mode.

(d) Analog Output Module (4 to 20 mA, 4 channels)
Only the 0 to 4000 mode can be used as the data format.
• 0 to 4000 mode: 4 to 20 mA / 0 to +4000

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to the 0 to 4000 mode.

(2) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed
Two types of service scans are available: normal and high-speed. A service
scan is recommended when using the high-speed segment function. The I/O
module is activated before the ladder decoding of the high-speed segments.
The I/Os that are processed in synchronization with the high-speed scan are
called High-speed Segment I/Os.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “NORMAL.”
(3) Output Status When CPU Stops
The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to
a stopped status can be specified. Any of the following settings is possible.

Open Output: All output terminals are opened.

Hold Output: The output values just prior to stopping.
Set by User: Preset values are output.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “OPEN OUTPUT.”

d) User Set Value

The data that is output when the CPU Module stops (when “SET BY USER” is spec-
ified for the timeout output) can be set. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to all
zeros.

4-40
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

This section describes the I/O allocations (maps) using the MEMOSOFT.

4.4.1 Analog Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-41

4.4.2 Analog Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-42
4.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-43

4.4.1 Analog Input Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section gives information on the MEMOSOFT I/O Traffic Cop Screen and the
Parameter Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i.e., I/O Allocation) Screen

(a
4
(b

Fig. 4.1 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter the Analog Input Module type, for example, 120AVI02000.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Analog Input Module.

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

(a
(b

Fig. 4.2 Parameter Setting Screen

4-41
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.4.2 Analog Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

a) Mode Set
Select the data format input from the Analog Input Module.
For some Analog Input Modules, no selection of data format is required.

b) Service Scan (Normal/High-speed)

Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O data refresh cycle.

c) Soft Filter
Select one of the following types of software filter.

• NO FILTER

• AVE 3 TIMES

• AVE 5 TIMES

4.4.2 Analog Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section gives information on the MEMOSOFT I/O Traffic Cop Screen and the
Parameter Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i.e., I/O Allocation) Screen

Fig. 4.3 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter the Analog Output Module type, for example, 120AVO01000.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Analog Output Module.

4-42
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

(a
(b

Fig. 4.4 Parameter Setting Screen

a) Mode Set
Select the data format output from the Analog Output Module.
For some Analog Output Modules, no selection of data format is required.

b) Service Scan (Normal/High-speed)

4
Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O data refresh cycle.

c) Timeout Output (Open/Hold/Set by user)

The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified:

OPOEN OUTPUT
HOLD OUTPUT
SET BY USER

d) Timeout Output Data

If “Timeout Output Data” is specified for c) Output Status When CPU Stops, set the
data output when the CPU Module stops.

4.4.3 I/O Allocations

This section explains the operation method of I/O Allocation taking the example of
Analog Input Modules. The operation method for Analog Output Modules is the
same as for Analog Input Modules.

1) I/O Allocation Items

I/Os must be allocated to use the Analog Input and Output Modules. I/O allocations
are made using the MEMOSOFT and the results are recorded in the I/O allocation
tables stored in memory of the CPU Module.

The following items must be set for I/O allocations.

• Module Type

• I/O References

• Mode

• Service Scan (Normal/High-speed scan)

4-43
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.4.3 I/O Allocations

• Software Filter (No filter/Ave 3 times/Ave 5 times)

Note: This item is to be set only for Analog Input Modules.

• Timeout Output (Open/Hold/Set by user)

Note: This item is to be set only for Analog Output Modules.

2) Setting the Module Type

Set the Module Type in the following procedure.

(1) Start the MEMOSOFT and select Online from the Mode Menu.

Fig. 4.5 Mode Selection: Online

I/O allocations cannot be performed while the CPU Module is in RUN status. If
necessary, stop the CPU Module. Refer to 6.1 PLC Operations in the
MEMOSOFT User’s Manual (Manual number SIEZ-C825-60.10) for the proce-
dure to stop the CPU Module.
(2) Press the F2 (Config) Key to access the PLC System Configuration Screen.

fx2

Fig. 4.6 PLC System Configuration Screen

4-44
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(3) Select I/O Map from the Map Menu using the Cursor Keys and press the Enter
Key.

fx4

Fig. 4.7 Selecting the I/O Map

(4) The I/O Map Screen will be displayed. Move the cursor to the slot to which the
allocations are to be made.

Fig. 4.8 I/O Map

If the Analog Input (or Output) Module is already mounted, the Module model
description will be displayed on the right.
(5) Press the Shift + ? Keys. A list of Module types will be displayed.
Move the cursor to 120AVI0200 and press the Enter Key to select the Analog
Input Module.

Fig. 4.9 Module Selection

4-45
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.4.3 I/O Allocations

3) Setting I/O References

A screen to allocate I/O (I/O Traffic Cop Screen) will be displayed.

(1) Input the reference number of the first input register:

Move the cursor to the field for the reference number of the first input register
and input the reference number. Press the Enter Key.

Input 300011

Fig. 4.10 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

(2) When the reference number of the first input register is input, the cursor will
move to the field for the reference number of the last input register and the ref-
erence number will be displayed automatically, indicating the reference number
that can be input. Press the Enter Key to accept the value or change it to the
desired value if necessary.

Input 300012
if you want to
change the
number

Fig. 4.11 Reference Number of First Input Register

(3) The reference number of the last input register will be displayed.

Fig. 4.12 Reference Number of Last Input Register

(4) This completes the setting of I/O references.

4-46
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

I/O references for the Analog Output Module can be set in the same way as for the
INFO
Analog Input Module.

4) Setting the Mode

Press the F4 (Zoom) Key to access to the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Mod-
ule Editor).

(1) Move the cursor to Mode and press the Enter Key to access the mode setting.

4
Fig. 4.13 Parameter Setting Screen: Mode
(2) A screen will appear so that the mode setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either 0 - 4000 MODE or -2000-+2000 MODE and press the
Enter Key to select the desired mode.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default as follows:
• Modules of the signal range ±10V: -2000-+2000 MODE

• Modules of the signal range 0 to 10V: 0 - 4000 MODE

• Modules of the signal range 0 to 5V: 0 - 4000 MODE

• Modules of the signal range 4 to 20-mA: 0 - 4000 MODE

Fig. 4.14 Mode Selection

5) Setting the Service Scan

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

4-47
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.4.3 I/O Allocations

(1) Move the cursor to Service scan and press the Enter Key to access the ser-
vice scan setting.

Fig. 4.15 Parameter Setting Screen: Service scan

(2) A screen will appear so that the service scan setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either NORMAL or HIGH and press the Enter Key to select
the desired scan service.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to NORMAL.

Fig. 4.16 Service Scan Selection

6) Setting the Software Filter (Only for Analog Input Modules)

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to Soft Filter and press the Enter Key to access the software
filter setting.

Fig. 4.17 Parameter Setting Screen: Software Filter

4-48
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(2) A screen will appear so that the software filter setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to NO FILTER, AVE 3 TIMES or AVE 5 TIMES and press the
Enter Key to select the desired software filter.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to NO FILTER.

Fig. 4.18 Software Filter Selection

INFO The software filter selection is only for Analog Input Modules, but not for Analog
Output Modules.
4
7) Setting the Timeout Output (Only for Analog Output Modules)
Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to OUT STATUS WHEN CPU STOP and press the Enter Key
to access the timeout output setting.

Fig. 4.19 Parameter Setting Screen: Timeout Output

(2) A screen will appear so that the timeout output setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to OPEN OUTPUT, HOLD OUTPUT or SET BY USER and
press the Enter Key to select the desired timeout output status. If HOLD OUT-
PUT is selected, the data just before the CPU Module entered STOP status will
be sent for all outputs until the CPU Module returns to RUN status.

4-49
4 Analog I/O Specifications
4.4.3 I/O Allocations

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to OPEN OUTPUT.

Fig. 4.20 Timeout Output Status Selection

Note: The timeout output setting is only for Analog Output Modules,
but not for Analog Input Modules.

8) Setting the Timeout Output Data (Only for Analog Output Modules)
Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to the input field for USER SET VAUE and input a value.
Then, press the Enter Key.

Input 100
for example

Fig. 4.21 Parameter Setting Screen: Timeout Output Data

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 0.

Fig. 4.22 Timeout Output Data Setting

Note: The timeout output data setting is only for Analog Output Mod-
ules, but not for Analog Input Modules.

4-50
4.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

9) This completes the I/O allocations.

Press the F9 (Quit) Key to end the procedure.

4-51
Register I/O Specifications

5
This chapter gives the specifications of Register I/O Modules.

5.1 Register Input Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

5.1.1 Register Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

5.2 Register Output Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

5.2.1 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

5.3 I/O Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10

5.3.1 Register Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.3.2 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13
5
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17
5.4.1 Register Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17
5.4.2 Register Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20

5-1
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.1.1 Register Input Modules

5.1 Register Input Specifications

This section describes performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections, and appearance of the 120-series Register Input Modules.

5.1.1 Register Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

5.1.1 Register Input Modules

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Name Register Input Module
Model Name REGISTER-IN
Model No. JAMSC-120RDI34410
Rated Voltage 12 VDC 24 VDC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 30 VDC
Input Form Sourcing or sinking
Rated Current 3.5 mA 7.0 mA
Data Input Circuit

Input Impedance 3.4 kΩ

Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 9 VDC
OFF voltage range: 5 VDC
Input Type Not compliant with JIS B3502 DC type 2
(according to JIS B 3502)
Input Delay Time OFF to ON: 5 ms max.
ON to OFF: 5ms max.
Number of Inputs 16 points
Input Signal Indication None
Rated Voltage 12 VDC 24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sinking output
Maximum Load Current 160 mA/point
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 V (0.1A) max.
Select Output Circuit

OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. (24 VDC)

Output Type Transistor outputs
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to JIS B 3502)
Built-in Fuse One 0.5-A fuse
(Blowout time: Five seconds max. at 200 % of rated current)
Surge suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16 points
Output Signal Indication None
External Connections 40-pin connector: one piece
Connector type: FCN-365P040 (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)

5-2
5.1 Register Input Specifications

Item Specifications
At 12 VDC At 24 VDC
Status Indication R: Lights while the Module is operating normally.
ACTIVE: Lights during input output processing.
F: Lights when the fuse is blown out or the output power supply
is disconnected.
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between the input out-
put terminals and the internal circuits.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between the
input output terminals and the ground (measured with a 500
VDC test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12 VDC supplied to signals 24 VDC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 150 mA max. at 5 VDC
Maximum Heat Value 3.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approx. Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration. 5

Connector CN1
Pin No.
INCOMM A11

B11

DATA1
Photo- B20
Internal circuits

coupler DATA2
A20
DATA3
B19
To CPU
DATA4
A19
3.3kΩ

+12/24V
A1
Contact points
Photo-
Internal circuits

B1
coupler

From CPU
SEL1
B10

+
12/24VDC
0V -
A2
Fuse
B2

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the Register I/O Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the Register I/O Modules, and
the guarantee is void.
5-3
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.1.1 Register Input Modules

Note: (1) The following pins of CN1 are internally connected:

A1 and B1, A2 and B2, A11 and B11
Also, connect them externally. Not connecting these pins externally may cause
malfunction of GL120 and GL130.
(2) The pin A12 and B12 are not connected.
(3) External connection connector (included)
Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
(4) Recommended wires
Use 0.26 mm2 (AWG23) wires for connections between the connector pins.

3) The following diagram shows an example of external connections.

Signals
1×100 (20) DATA 1 B20
2×100 (21) DATA 2 A20
4×100 (22) DATA 3 B19
8×100 (23) DATA 4 A19
1×101 (24) DATA 5 B18
2×101 (25) DATA 6 A18
4×101 (26) DATA 7 B17
To other
8×101 (27) DATA 8 A17 group of
1×102 (28) DATA 9 B16 contact
2×102 (29) DATA 10 A16 points
4×102 (210) DATA 11 B15
8×102 (211) DATA 12 A15
1×103 (212) DATA 13 B14
2×103 (213) DATA 14 A14
4×103 (214) DATA 15 B13
8×103 (215) DATA 16 A13
B12
Binary A12
BCD B11 A group of
contact points A group of contact points
A11
SELECT 1 SEL 1 B10
SELECT 2 SEL 2 A10
SELECT 3 SEL 3 B9
SELECT 4 SEL 4 A9
SELECT 5 SEL 5 B8
SELECT 6 SEL 6 A8
SELECT 7 SEL 7 B7
SELECT 8 SEL 8 A7
To other
SELECT 9 SEL 9 B6 group of
SELECT 10 SEL 10 A6 contact
SELECT 11 SEL 11 B5 points
SELECT 12 SEL 12 A5
SELECT 13 SEL 13 B4
SELECT 14 SEL 14 A4
SELECT 15 SEL 15 B3
SELECT 16 SEL 16 A3
B2
A2
0.5-A Fuse B1 + -
A1 12/24 VDC

Note: External connection cable

The cable type W5410 for 64-point I/O Modules are available for external connec-
tion cables. For the details, refer to 3.3 I/O Module Cables.

5-4
5.1 Register Input Specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description
(120RDI34410)

Color code (Light blue)

LED area

Connector CN1

Module mounting screw Connector cover

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver).

LED Area
120 RDI 344 10 LED Color Indication when ON
R Green Module is operating normally.
R ACTIVE F
ACTIVE Green Module is in service with CPU Module.
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
connected.

5) Accessories
The followings are provided with the Module.

• External connection connector

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)

5-5
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.2.1 Register Output Modules

5.2 Register Output Specifications

This section describes performance specifications, circuit configuration, external

connections, and appearance of the 120-series Register Output Modules.

5.2.1 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

5.2.1 Register Output Modules

1) Performance Specifications

Item Specifications
Name Register Output Module
Model Name REGISTER-OUT
Model No. JAMSC-120RDO34410
Rated Voltage 12/24 VDC
Allowable Voltage Range 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
Output Form Sinking output
Maximum Load Current Data output circuit: 100 mA per point, 800 mA per 16 points
Select output circuit: 100 mA per point
Output Voltage Drop 1.5V (0.1A) max.
Output Delay Time OFF to ON: 1 ms max.
ON to OFF: 1 ms max.
Output Circuits

OFF Leakage Current 1 mA max. (24 VDC)

Output Type Transistor output
Output Protection Type Data output circuit: Protected output (according to JIS B 3502)
Select output circuit: Unprotected output
(according to JIS B 3502)
Built-in Fuse One 1-A fuse
(Blowout time: Two minute max. at 200 % of rated current)
Surge suppressor None
Other Output Protections None
Number of Outputs Data output circuit: 16 points
Select output circuit: 16 points
Output Signal Indication None
External Connections 40-pin connector: one piece
Connector type: FCN-365P040 (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Status Indication R: Lights while the Module is operating normally.
ACTIVE: Lights during output processing
F: Lights when the fuse is blown out or the output power supply
is disconnected.
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between the output
terminals (connected together) and the internal circuits.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between the
output terminals and the ground (measured with a 500 VDC
test voltage megohmmeter).
External Power Supply 12/24 VDC supplied to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 400 mA max. at 5 VDC

5-6
5.2 Register Output Specifications

Item Specifications
Maximum Heat Value 3.5 W
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Approx. Mass 300g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

2) The following diagram shows the circuit configuration.

Connector CN1
Pin No.
DATA1
B20
Photo- DATA2
coupler A20
DATA3
B19
From CPU
DATA4
A19
Internal circuits

LED indicator
+12/24V
A11 (with latch)

+ - Latch
B11

A1 5
Photo-
coupler B1

SEL1
B10

0V
A12
+
B12 -
Fuse
A2
12/24VDC
B2

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the Register I/O Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the Register I/O Modules, and
the guarantee is void.

Note: (1) The following pins of CN1 are internally connected: The pins A1, B1, A11, and
B11, and the pins A2, B2, A12, and B12.
Also connect these pins externally. Not connecting these pins externally may
cause malfunction of GL120 and GL130.
(2) External connection connector (included)
Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
(3) Recommended wires
Use 0.26 mm2 (AWG23) wires for connections between the connector pins.

5-7
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.2.1 Register Output Modules

3) The following diagram shows an example of external connections.

Signals
1×100 (20) DATA 1 B20
2×100 (21) DATA 2 A20
4×100 (22) DATA 3 B19
8×100 (23) DATA 4 A19
1×101 (24) DATA 5 B18
2×101 (25) DATA 6 A18
4×101 (26) DATA 7 B17
8×101 (27) DATA 8 A17 To other
1×102 (28) DATA 9 B16 indicators
2×102 (29) DATA 10 A16
4×102 (210) DATA 11 B15
8×102 (211) DATA 12 A15
1×103 (212) DATA 13 B14
2×103 (213) DATA 14 A14
4×103 (214) DATA 15 B13
8×103 (215) DATA 16 A13
B12
Binary
A12
BCD
B11 LED indicator (with latch) LED indicator (with latch)
A11
SELECT 1 SEL 1 B10
SELECT 2 SEL 2 A10
SELECT 3 SEL 3 B9
SELECT 4 SEL 4 A9
SELECT 5 SEL 5 B8
SELECT 6 SEL 6 A8
SELECT 7 SEL 7 B7
SELECT 8 SEL 8 A7
SELECT 9 SEL 9 B6
To other
SELECT 10 SEL 10 A6 indicators
SELECT 11 SEL 11 B5
SELECT 12 SEL 12 A5
SELECT 13 SEL 13 B4
SELECT 14 SEL 14 A4
SELECT 15 SEL 15 B3
SELECT 16 SEL 16 A3
B2
A2
0.5 A Fuse B1
12/24 VDC
A1

Note: External connection cable

The cable type W5410 for 64-point I/O Modules are available for external connec-
tion cables. For the details, refer to 3.3 I/O Module Cables.

5-8
5.2 Register Output Specifications

4) External Appearance

Module description
(120RDO34410)

Color code (Dark blue)

LED area

Connector CN1

Module mounting screw Connector cover

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 RDO 344 10 LED Color Indication when ON
R Green Module is operating normally.
R ACTIVE F
ACTIVE Green Module is in service with CPU Module.
F Red Fuse blown out, or external power supply not
connected.

5) Accessories
The followings are provided with the Module.

• External connection connector

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (made by Fujitsu Ltd.)

5-9
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.3.1 Register Input Modules

5.3 I/O Allocation

This section explains the I/O Allocation of 120-series Register I/O Modules.

5.3.1 Register Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10

5.3.2 Register Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13

5.3.1 Register Input Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

Also, the following parameter settings are necessary to control Register Input Mod-
ules.

• Service Scan (Normal/High-speed scan)

• Mode

• Cycle

• Select Timing

Setting these items is called I/O allocation. I/O allocation is performed by using
MEMOSOFT, and the settings are recorded as the I/O allocation tables and stored
in memory in the CPU Module.

For specific setting procedures, refer to the following manuals.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7): Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10): Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25): Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Input Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type.
Only the last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For
example, 120RDI34410 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120RDI34410.

5-10
5.3 I/O Allocation

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

The following table shows the I/O reference numbers and points that can be allo-
cated.

Type of Input References for I/O Allocation Number of Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Input registers 30001 to 300512 300001 to 300512 1 to 16 registers

4) Parameter Setting
a) Service Scan: Normal/High-speed
Two types of service scans are available: normal and high-speed. A service scan
is recommended when using the high-speed segment function. The I/O module is
activated before the ladder decoding of the high-speed segments. The I/Os that are
processed in synchronization with the high-speed scan are called High-speed Seg-
ment I/Os. The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “NORMAL.”

b) Mode
The number of data input from the Register Input Module can be set.
Either 8CH or 16CH can be set.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “16CH.”

c) Cycle
5
The reading cycle of input data can be set.

Any of six cycles listed in the following table can be set according to the set mode.

Table 5.1 Cycles

Mode 8CH 16CH

Cycle 10 ms 20 ms
32 ms 64 ms
64 ms 128 ms
192 ms 384 ms
320 ms 640 ms
User set User set

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 32/64 ms.

When a specified value is set for the cycle, the values of Timing T1 and T2 are set
according to the set cycle.
The following table shows the values of Select Timings when a specified value is
selected for the cycle.

Table 5.2 Select Timing When a Specified Value is Selected for Cycle

Mode Timing
8CH 16CH T1 T2
10 ms 20 ms 0.9 ms 0.4 ms
32 ms 64 ms 3.5 ms 0.5 ms
64 ms 128 ms 7.0 ms 1.0 ms
192 ms 384 ms 21.0 ms 3.0 ms
320 ms 640 ms 35.0 ms 5.0 ms

5-11
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.3.1 Register Input Modules

d) Select Timings (T1, T2)

(1) Select Timing T1
Any of the values listed in the following tables can be selected for Select Timing
T1 when the cycle is set to “USER SET.”

Table 5.3 Select Timing T1

Select Timing T1
0.9 ms 7.5 ms 14.5 ms 21.5 ms 28.5 ms
1.0 ms 8.0 ms 15.0 ms 22.0 ms 29.0 ms
1.5 ms 8.5 ms 15.5 ms 22.5 ms 29.5 ms
2.0 ms 9.0 ms 16.0 ms 23.0 ms 30.0 ms
2.5 ms 9.5 ms 16.5 ms 23.5 ms 30.5 ms
3.0 ms 10.0 ms 17.0 ms 24.0 ms 31.0 ms
3.5 ms 10.5 ms 17.5 ms 24.5 ms 31.5 ms
4.0 ms 11.0 ms 18.0 ms 25.0 ms 32.0 ms
4.5 ms 11.5 ms 18.5 ms 25.5 ms 32.5 ms
5.0 ms 12.0 ms 19.0 ms 26.0 ms 33.0 ms
5.5 ms 12.5 ms 19.5 ms 26.5 ms 33.5 ms
6.0 ms 13.0 ms 20.0 ms 27.0 ms 34.0 ms
6.5 ms 13.5 ms 20.5 ms 27.5 ms 34.5 ms
7.0 ms 14.0 ms 21.0 ms 28.0 ms 35.0 ms

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 3.5 ms.

(2) Select Timing T2
Any of the values listed in the following tables canbe selected for Select Timing
T2 when the cycle is set to “USER SET.”

Table 5.4 Select Timing T2

Select Timing T2
0.4 ms 1.5 ms 3.0 ms 4.5 ms
0.5 ms 2.0 ms 3.5 ms 5.0 ms
1.0 ms 2.5 ms 4.0 ms −

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 0.5 ms.

e) Data Reading Timing

The data reading timing is shown in the following diagram.

Data 16 1 2

SEL1
Reads data

T1 T2

SEL2

Fig. 5.1 Data Reading Timing

5-12
5.3 I/O Allocation

5.3.2 Register Output Modules

1) Purpose of I/O Allocation

• Module Type

• I/O Reference Numbers

Also, the following parameter settings are necessary to control Register Output
Modules.

• Service Scan (Normal/High-speed Scan)

• Timeout Output (Clear/Hold)

• Mode

• Cycle

• Select Timing

Setting these items is called I/O allocation. I/O allocation is performed using
MEMOSOFT and the settings are recorded in the I/O allocation tables stored in
5
memory in the CPU Module.

For specific setting procedures, refer to the following manuals.

• MEOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for P120 Programming Panel User’s

Manual (Manual No. SIEZ-C825-60.7): Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for DOS User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10): Chapter 7 Setting System Configuration.

• MEMOCON GL120, GL130 MEMOSOFT for Windows User’s Manual (Manual

No. SIEZ-C825-60.25): Chapter 6 Setting the Module Configuration.

2) Module Type Setting

The type of Output Module mounted in the slot is set as the Module type. Only the
last 11 alphanumeric characters of the model number are necessary. For example,
120RDO34410 is the Module type for the JAMSC-120RDO34410.

3) I/O Reference Number Setting

The following table shows the I/O reference numbers and points that can be allo-
cated.

Type of Output References for I/O Allocation Number of Registers

CPU10, CPU20, CPU21 CPU30, CPU35
Output registers 400001 to 400512 400001 to 400512 1 to 16 registers

5-13
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.3.2 Register Output Modules

b) Timeout Output (Clear/Hold)

The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified. Either of the following settings is possible.

• Clear: “0” is output.

• Hold: The data just before entering stopped status is output.

c) Mode
The number of data output from the Register Output Module can be set.
Either 8CH or 16CH can be specified.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to “16CH.”

d) Cycle
The cycle to read the output data can be set.
Any of five cycles listed in the following table can be set.

Table 5.5 Cycle

Mode 8CH 16CH

Cycle 32 ms 64 ms
64 ms 128 ms
192 ms 384 ms
320 ms 640 ms
User set User set

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 32/64 ms.

When a specified value is set for the cycle, the values of select Timing T1, T2, T3,
and T4 are set according to the set cycle.
The following table shows the values of Select Timing when the cycle is set to a
specified value.

Table 5.6 Select Timing When a Specified Value is Set for Cycle

Mode Select Timing

8CH 16CH T1 T2 T3 T4
32 ms 64 ms 1.0 ms 1.5 ms 1.0 ms 0.5 ms
64 ms 128 ms 2.0 ms 3.0 ms 2.0 ms 1.0 ms
192 ms 384 ms 6.0 ms 9.0 ms 6.0 ms 3.0 ms
320 ms 640 ms 10.0 ms 15.0 ms 10.0 ms 5.0 ms

5-14
5.3 I/O Allocation

e) Select Timing (T1, T2 T3, and T4)

(1) Select Timing T1
Any of the values listed in the following tables can be selected for Select Timing
T1 when the cycle is set to “USER SET.”

Table 5.7 Select Timing T1

Select Timing T1 When “UESR SET” is Set for Cycle

1.0 ms 3.0 ms 5.0 ms 7.0 ms 9.0 ms
1.5 ms 3.5 ms 5.5 ms 7.5 ms 9.5 ms
2.0 ms 4.0 ms 6.0 ms 8.0 ms 10.0 ms
2.5 ms 4.5 ms 6.5 ms 8.5 ms −

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 1.0 ms.

(2) Select Timing T2
Any of the values listed in the following tables canbe selected for Select Timing
T2 when the cycle is set to “USER SET.”

Table 5.8 Select Timing T2

Select Timing T2 When “USER SET” is Set for Cycle

1.0 ms 3.0 ms 5.0 ms 7.0 ms 9.0 ms
1.5 ms 3.5 ms 5.5 ms 7.5 ms 9.5 ms
2.0 ms 4.0 ms 6.0 ms 8.0 ms 10.0 ms 5
2.5 ms 4.5 ms 6.5 ms 8.5 ms −

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 1.0 ms.

(3) Select Timing T3
Any of the values listed in the following tables canbe selected for Select Timing
T3 when the cycle is set to “UESR SET.”

Table 5.9 Select Timing T3

Select Timing T3 When “USER SET” is Set for Cycle

1.0 ms 3.0 ms 5.0 ms 7.0 ms 9.0 ms
1.5 ms 3.5 ms 5.5 ms 7.5 ms 9.5 ms
2.0 ms 4.0 ms 6.0 ms 8.0 ms 10.0 ms
2.5 ms 4.5 ms 6.5 ms 8.5 ms −

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 1.0 ms.

(4) Select Timing T4
Any of the values listed in the following tables canbe selected for Select Timing
T4 when the cycle is set to “USER SET.”

Table 5.10 Select Timing T4

Select Timing T4 When “UESR SET” is Set for Cycle

0.5 ms 1.5 ms 2.5 ms 3.5 ms 4.5 ms
1.0 ms 2.0 ms 3.0 ms 4.0 ms 5.0 ms

The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 0.5 ms.

5-15
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.3.2 Register Output Modules

f) Data Output Timing

The data output timing is shown in the following diagram.

Data Valid data Valid data

SEL1

T1 T2 T3 T4

SEL2

Fig. 5.2 Data Output Timing

5-16
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

This section describes the I/O allocations using the MEMOSOFT.

5.4.1 Register Input Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17

5.4.2 Register Output Module I/O Allocation Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.4.3 I/O Allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20

5.4.1 Register Input Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section describes the MEMOSOFT I/O Allocation Screen and the Parameter
Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i. e., I/O Allocation) Screen

In this screen, set the following items.

b)
5

Fig. 5.3 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter 120RDI34410 for the Register Input Module.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Register Input Module.

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

In this screen, set the following items.

b)
c)
d)

Fig. 5.4 Parameter Setting Screen

5-17
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.2 Register Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

a) Service Scan (Normal/High-speed)

Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O processing.

b) Mode (8CH/16CH)
Select the number of data input from the Register Input Module.
Set either 8CH or 16CH.

c) Cycle
Select a cycle to read the input data. Each mode has six cycles.

d) Select Timing
If the cycle is set to “UESR SET,” the timing to read the input data can be selected.

5.4.2 Register Output Module I/O Allocation Screen

This section describes the MEMOSOFT I/O Allocation Screen and the Parameter
Setting Screen.

1) The I/O Traffic Cop (i. e., I/O Allocation) Screen

In this screen, set the following items.

Fig. 5.5 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

a) Module Type
Enter 120RDO34410 for the Register Output Module.

b) Set the I/O references to be used by the Register Output Module.

5-18
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

2) The Parameter Setting Screen (Zoom)

In this screen, set the following items.

Fig. 5.6 Parameter Setting Screen

a) Service Scan (Normal/High-speed)

Set either Normal or High-speed scan for I/O processing.

b) Timeout Output (Clear/Hold)

The data that is output when the CPU Module changes from a running status to a
stopped status can be specified:
Clear: “0” is output. 5
Hold: The data just before entering stopped status is output.

c) Mode (8CH/16CH)
To set the number of data output from the Register Output Module.
Set either 8CH or 16CH mode.

d) Cycle
The cycle to switch the output data can be selected.
Select one among five cycles for the set mode.

e) Select Timing
If the cycle is set to “USER SET”, the timing to switch the output data can be
selected.

5-19
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.3 I/O Allocations

5.4.3 I/O Allocations

1) I/O Allocation Items

I/O Modules must be allocated to use the Register Input and Output Modules. I/O
allocations are made using the MEMOSOFT and the results are recorded in the I/O
allocation tables stored in memory of the CPU Module.

The following items must be set for I/O allocations.

• Module Type

• I/O References

• Service Scan (Normal/High-speed scan)

• Timeout Output (Clear/Hold)*

Note: This item is to be set only for Register Output Module.

• Mode (8CH/16CH)

• Cycle

• Select Timing

This section describes the operation method of I/O Allocation taking the example of
INFO Register Output Modules. The operation method for Register Input Modules is the
same as for Register Output Modules.

2) Module Type Setting

Set the Module Type in the following procedure.

(1) Start the MEMOSOFT and select Online from the Mode Menu.

Fig. 5.7 Mode Selection: Online

I/O allocations cannot be performed while the CPU Module is in RUN status. If
necessary, stop the CPU Module. For the procedure to stop the CPU Module,
refer to 6.1 PLC Operations in the MEMOSOFT User’s Manual (Manual No.
SIEZ-C825-60.10).

5-20
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(2) Press the F2 (Config) Key to access the PLC System Configuration Screen.

fx2

Fig. 5.8 PLC System Configuration Screen

(3) Select I/O Map from the Map Menu using the Cursor Keys and press the Enter
Key.

fx4

Fig. 5.9 I/O Map Selection

(4) The I/O Map Screen is displayed. Move the cursor to the slot to which the allo-
cations are to be made.

Fig. 5.10 I/O Map

If the Register I/O Module is already mounted, the Module name will be dis-
played on the right.

5-21
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.3 I/O Allocations

(5) Press the Shift + ? Keys. A list of Module types appears.

Move the cursor to 120RDO34410 and press the Enter Key to select the Reg-
ister Output Module.

Fig. 5.11 Module Selection

3) I/O References Setting

The I/O Traffic Cop Screen is displayed.

Set the I/O reference in the following procedure.

(1) Input the reference number of the first output register:

Move the cursor to the field for the reference number of the first output register
and input the reference number. Press the Enter Key.

Input 400011.

Fig. 5.12 I/O Traffic Cop Screen

5-22
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

(2) When the reference number of the first output register is input, the cursor
moves to the field for the reference number of the last output register and the
reference number will be displayed automatically, indicating the reference
number that can be input. Press the Enter Key to accept the value or change it
to the desired value if necessary.

Input 400020.

Fig. 5.13 Reference Number of First Output Register

(3) The last reference number of the output register will be displayed.

Fig. 5.14 Reference Number of Last Output Register

(4) This completes the setting of I/O references.

I/O references for the Register Input Module can be set in the same way as the
INFO
Register Output Module.

5-23
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.3 I/O Allocations

4) Service Scan Setting

Use the following procedure to set the Register Input/Output Module parameters.
Press the F4 (Zoom) Key to access the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module
Editor).

(1) Move the cursor to Service scan and press the Enter Key to access the ser-
vice scan setting.

Fig. 5.15 Parameter Setting Screen: Service scan

(2) A screen appears so that the service scan setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either Normal or High Speed and press the Enter Key to
select the desired scan service.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to Normal.

Fig. 5.16 Service Scan Selection

5-24
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

5) Timeout Output Status Setting (Only for Register Output Module)

Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to Time out and press the Enter Key to access the timeout
output setting.

Fig. 5.17 Parameter Setting Screen: Timeout Output

(2) A screen appears so that the timeout output setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either Clear or Retain and press the Enter Key to select
the desired timeout output status. If Retain is selected, the data just before the
CPU Module entered STOP status will be sent for all outputs until the CPU 5
Module returns to RUN status.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to Clear.

Fig. 5.18 Timeout Output Status Selection

INFO This Timeout output setting is only for Register Output Modules, but not for Register
Input Module.

5-25
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.3 I/O Allocations

6) Mode Setting
Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to Mode and press the Enter Key to access the mode setting.

Fig. 5.19 Parameter Setting Screen: Mode

(2) A screen appears so that the mode setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to either 8CH or 16CH and press the Enter Key to select the
desired mode.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 16CH.

Fig. 5.20 Mode Selection

5-26
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

7) Cycle Setting
Make sure that the Parameter Setting Screen (I/O Map Module Editor) is being dis-
played.

(1) Move the cursor to Cycle and press the Enter Key to access the cycle setting.

Fig. 5.21 Parameter Setting Screen: Cycle

(2) A screen appears so that the cycle setting can be selected.
Move the cursor to the desired cycle or “USER SET” and press the Enter Key
to select the desired cycle.
The MEMOSOFT is set by default to 32/64 ms.
5

Fig. 5.22 Cycle Selection

5-27
5 Register I/O Specifications
5.4.3 I/O Allocations

8) Setting the Select Timings T1, T2, T3, and T4

If the cycle is set to USER SET, the cursor can be moved to the field of select timing.

(1) Move the cursor to Timing T1 and press the Enter Key.

Fig. 5.23 Parameter Setting Screen

(2) A screen appears so that the timing T1 setting can be selected.
For example, to select 5.0 ms, move the cursor to 5.0 and press the Enter Key.

The MEMOSOFT is set by default: 3.5 ms for Register Input Module and 1.0
ms for Register Output Module.

Fig. 5.24 Timing T1 Selection

(3) 5.0 ms is set for the timing T1.

Fig. 5.25 Timing T1 Setting

(4) Repeat the above procedure to set the timings T2, T3, and T4.
(5) Press F9 (End) Key after completes the all parameter settings.

5-28
5.4 Operations Using MEMOSOFT

9) This completes the I/O allocations

Press the F9 (Quit) Key to end the procedure.

5-29
Installation and Wiring

6
6.1 Installing Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1 Module Installation Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10

6.2 Panel Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13

6.2.1 Separation of Power Supply Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6.2.4 Wiring Analog I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25
6.2.5 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28

6.3 External Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.3.1 External Wiring for Digital I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
6
6.4 Precautions on Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
6.4.1 AC Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
6.4.2 AC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
6.4.3 DC Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
6.4.4 DC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
6.4.5 Connections between AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-49
6.4.6 Connections between DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.7 Analog Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.8 Analog Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
6.4.9 External Power Supplies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52

6-1
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.1 Module Installation Location

6.1 Installing Modules

This section describes how to install Modules on a Mounting Base in the control
panel.

6.1.1 Module Installation Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2

6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10

6.1.1 Module Installation Location

1) Module Installation Loacation

Install the following Modules on a Mounting Base. The mounting procedures for
installing I/O Modules and Special Purpose Modules on the Mounting Base are
described in 6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks and 6.1.3 Installing
I/O Modules with Connectors.

• Power Supply Modules

• CPU Modules

• Communication Modules

• I/O Modules

• Special Purpose Modules

• Motion Modules

• Expander Modules

2) Module Installation Location on Mounting Base

The following table shows the Module installation location on the Mounting Base.

Table 6.1 Module Installation Location on Mounting Base

Product Name Model No. Installation Location

Digital Input 100-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI54300 Any rack on the Mounting
Modules Base
200-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI74300
12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI34300
12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI35400
12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI36400
Analog Input Analog Input Module JAMSC-120AVI02000 Any rack on the Mounting
Modules (±10V, 4 channels) Base
Analog Input Module JAMSC-120AVI02100
(0 to 10V, 4 channels)
Analog Input Module JAMSC-120ACI02000
(0 to 20 mA, 4 channels)

6-2
6.1 Installing Modules

Table 6.1 Module Installation Location on Mounting Base

Product Name Model No. Installation Location

Digital Output 100/200-VAC 8-point Output JAMSC-120DAO83000 Any rack on the Mounting
Modules Module Base
100/200-VAC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DAO84300
Module
12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module JAMSC-120DDO33000
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34310
Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34320
Module (sourcing)
12/24-VDC 32-point Output JAMSC-120DDO35410
Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 64-point Output JAMSC-120DDO36410
Module (sinking)
Relay Contact 16-point Output JAMSC-120DRA84300
Module
Analog Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01000 Any rack on the Mounting
Output (±10V, 2 channels) Base
Modules Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01100
(0 to 10V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01200
(0 to 5V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Module JAMSC-120ACO01000
(4 to 20 mA, 2 channels)
Special Register Input Module JAMSC-120RDI34410 Any rack on the Mounting
Purpose
Modules
Register Output Module JAMSC-120RDO34410 Base 6
3) Module Installation and Removal Methods
For the Module installation and removal methods, refer to the section number in the
following table.

Table 6.2 Module Installation and Removal Methods

Product Name Model No. Reference Section

Digital Input 100-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI54300 6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules
Modules with Terminal Blocks
200-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI74300
12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI34300
12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI35400 6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules
with Connectors
12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module JAMSC-120DDI36400
Analog Input Analog Input Module JAMSC-120AVI02000 6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules
Modules (±10V, 4 channels) with Terminal Blocks
Analog Input Module JAMSC-120AVI02100
(0 to 10V, 4 channels)
Analog Input Module JAMSC-120ACI02000
(0 to 20 mA, 4 channels)

6-3
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

Table 6.2 Module Installation and Removal Methods

Product Name Model No. Reference Section

Digital Output 100/200-VAC 8-point Output JAMSC-120DAO83000 6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules
Modules Module with Terminal Blocks
100/200-VAC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DAO84300
Module
12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module JAMSC-120DDO33000
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34310
Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34320
Module (sourcing)
Relay Contact 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO35410
Modules
12/24-VDC 32-point Output JAMSC-120DDO36410 6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules
Module (sinking) with Connectors
12/24-VDC 64-point Output JAMSC-120DRA84300
Module (sinking)
Analog Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01000 6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules
Output (±10V, 2 channels) with Terminal Blocks
Modules Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01100
(0 to 10V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Module JAMSC-120AVO01200
(0 to 5V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Module JAMSC-120ACO01000
(4 to 20 mA, 2 channels)
Special Register Input Module JAMSC-120RDI34410 6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules
Purpose Register Output Module JAMSC-120RDO34410 with Connectors
Modules

6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

This section describes the installation and removal procedures for the following I/O
Modules with Terminal Blocks

• I/O Modules with terminal blocks

• Special Purpose Modules with terminal blocks

• M-NET Module

1) Installing the Module on the Mounting Base

CAUTION Do not remove the connector covers from the Module connectors on the Mounting
Base slots where no Modules are installed.

The presence of any foreign matter in a Module connector may cause the
GL120 and GL130 to malfunction.

CAUTION Make sure that all mounting screws for the Modules are securely tightened.
Loose screws may cause malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

6-4
6.1 Installing Modules

Install the Module with Terminal Blocks on the Mounting Base in the following man-
ner.

a) Remove the cover from the Module connector on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

Module connector

b) Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, then remove the terminal block from the
Module.

Terminal block
mounting screw

Terminal block

6
Terminal block mounting screw

Module

c) Install the Module on the Mounting Base as shown below.

(1) Hook the Module to the Module hook on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

Module

Module
connector

Mounting Base

6-5
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

(2) Rotate the Module until it comes into contact with the Mounting Base.

Module hook

Module

Module
connector
Rotate

(3) Fit the Module to make an electrical connection with the Module connector.

Mounting Base

Module

(4) Tighten the Module mounting screw on the Module.

Module

Module mounting screw M4 (Use a Phillips screwdriver.)

2) Installing the Terminal Block on the Module

CAUTION When installing the terminal block for the AC I/O Modules, turn OFF the AC power
supply to the I/O Modules for inputting signals and for driving load.

Installing a terminal block with the AC power being supplied to the terminal of
the external power supply for the AC I/O Modules may cause an electric shock
if the power supply terminals are touched.

CAUTION When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving loads of the
Relay Contact Output Module, turn OFF the AC power to the Modules for driving
loads before installing the terminal block for the Modules.

6-6
6.1 Installing Modules

Make sure that all mounting screws for the terminal block are securely tightened.
CAUTION
Loose screws may cause malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

Use the following procedures to install the terminal block for the Module.

a) Make sure that the Module is correctly installed on the Mounting Base.
b) Turn OFF the power (power supply for input signals and power supply for driving
loads) to the Module.
c) Install the terminal block on the Module as shown below.
(1) Fit the terminal block onto the Module.

Terminal block

Module Fit in

(2) Tighten two terminal-block mounting screws alternately.

Terminal block mounting screw

Terminal block

Terminal block mounting screw

(3) Tighten the terminal block mounting screws until the terminal block closely
attaches to the Module as shown in the following figure.

Module

(4) Close the terminal block cover.

6-7
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.2 Installing I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

3) Removing the Terminal Block from the Module

CAUTION Always turn OFF the AC power supply to the AC I/O Modules that are used for
inputting signals and driving loads before removing the terminal block from the AC I/O
Modules.

Removing a terminal block with AC power to the external power supply terminal
of the AC I/O Modules may cause an electric shock at touching the power sup-
ply terminals.

CAUTION When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving loads of the
Relay Contact Output Module, turn OFF the AC power to the Modules for driving
loads before removing the terminal block for the Modules.

Use the following procedures to remove the terminal block from the Module.

a) Turn OFF the power to the Module.

b) Remove the terminal block from the Module as shown below.
(1) Loosen two terminal-block mounting screws alternately.
Terminal block mounting screw
Terminal block

Terminal block mounting screw

(2) Remove the terminal block from the Module

Terminal block

Module Remove

4) Removing Modules
CAUTION When inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while the AC power supply is turned
ON, install a safety switch for each Module and always turn this safety switch OFF to
turn OFF the AC p ower supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while AC power is being supplied may

result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

6-8
6.1 Installing Modules

When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving the loads of
CAUTION the Relay Contact Output Module, install a safety switch for each Module. Before
inserting or removing the Relay Contact Output Module, always turn this safety switch
OFF to turn OFF the AC power supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing a Relay Contact Output Module while AC power is being

supplied may result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

Use the following procedures to remove the Module from the Mounting Base.

a) Make sure that the terminal block is removed from the Module.
b) Remove the Module from the Mounting Base as shown below.
(1) Loosen the Module mounting screw.

Module

Module mounting screw

(2) Rotate the Module until it disconnects from the Mounting Base.

Module hook
6

Module

Module
connector
Rotate

c) Remove the Module from the Module hook on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

Module

Module
connector

Mounting Base

6-9
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors

6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors

This section describes the installation and removal procedures for the following I/O
Modules with connectors.

• 12/24 VDC 32-point I/O Modules

• 12/24 VDC 64-point I/O Modules

• Special Purpose Modules with Connectors

1) Installing the Module on the Mounting Base

CAUTION Do not remove the connector covers from the Module connectors on the Mounting
Base slots where no Modules are installed.

The presence of any foreign matter in a Module connector may cause the
GL120 and GL130 to malfunction.

CAUTION Make sure that all mounting screws for the Modules are securely tightened.

Loose screws may cause malfunction of the GL120 and GL130.

Install the Module with Connectors on the Mounting Base in the following manner.

a) Remove the cover from the module connector on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

Module connector

b) Install the Module on the Mounting Base as shown below.

(1) Hook the Module to the Module hook on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

DC24IN-32P

Module
connector
Mounting base

6-10
6.1 Installing Modules

(2) Rotate the Module until it comes into contact with the Mounting Base.

Module hook

DC24IN-32P

Module
connector
Rotate

(3) Fit the Module into the Mounting Base to make an electrical connection with
the Module connector.

DC24IN-32P

(4) Tighten the Module mounting screw on the Module.

DC24IN-32P

Module mounting screw M4

(Use a Phillips screwdriver.)

2) Connecting the Cable to the Module

CAUTION Make sure that all cable connectors for the Modules are securely inserted and
tightened.

Incorrect connections may cause malfunction of the GL120 or GL130.

Use the following procedures to connect the cable to the Module.

(1) Make sure that the Module is correctly installed on the Mounting Base.
(2) Insert the cable into the connector mounted on the Module.
(3) Tighten the connector fixing screw.
Note: Inserting or removing a connector to/from the Module may cause chattering in
input signals. If this causes a problem, install a chattering prevention switch
for each Module and always turn the chattering prevention switch OFF to turn
OFF the input power supply before inserting or removing the connector to/
from the Module.

6-11
6 Installation and Wiring
6.1.3 Installing I/O Modules with Connectors

3) Disconnecting the Cable from the Module

Use the following procedure to disconnect the cable from the Module.

(1) Loosen the connector fixing screw.

(2) Remove the connector from the Module.
Note: Inserting or removing a connector to/from the Module may cause chattering
in input signals. If this causes a problem, install a chattering prevention
switch for each Module and always turn the chattering prevention switch
OFF to turn OFF the input power supply before inserting or removing the
connector to/from the Module.

4) Removing the Module from the Mounting Base

Use the following procedure to remove the Module from the Mounting Base.

(1) Loosen the Module mounting screw on the Module.

DC24IN-32P

Module mounting screw M4

(Use a Phillips screwdriver.)

(2) Rotate the Module until it disconnects from the Mounting Base.

Module hook

DC24IN-32P

Module
connector
Rotate

(3) Remove the Module from the Module hook on the Mounting Base.

Module hook

DC24IN-32P

Module
connector
Mounting base

6-12
6.2 Panel Wiring

6.2 Panel Wiring

This section explains basic wiring procedures and precautions for I/O Modules.
It also explains grounding of Modules.

6.2.1 Separation of Power Supply Systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13

6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
6.2.4 Wiring Analog I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25
6.2.5 Grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28

6.2.1 Separation of Power Supply Systems

1) The power supply circuits for the GL120 and GL130 can be divided into the following
four systems:
a) Power supply for the Power Supply Module
b) Power supply for I/O circuits
c) Power supply for operation circuits
d) Power supply for main circuits

2) Wire these circuits so that are separated from each other as shown in the following fig-
ure.

EXAMPLE

200 VAC Main circuits 6

Operation circuits

Power Supply
Module

I/O circuits

Wiring circuit-breaker Insulation transformer

6-13
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules

6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules

This section explains how to connect a power supply cable and an I/O signal cable
to an AC I/O Module.

1) AC Power Supply Specifications

a) As shown in Examples 1 and 2 later in this section, it is necessary to supply external
single-phase AC power (100 or 200VAC) to the AC I/O Modules listed in the follow-
ing table to power input signals and drive loads.

Table 6.3 AC I/O Modules Requiring External AC Power Supply

Name Model No. External Power Supply Specifications

Rated Voltage Rated Frequency
100-VAC 16-point JAMSC-120DAI54300 100 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Module
200-VAC 16-point JAMSC-120DAI74300 200 VAC
Input Module
100/200-VAC 8-point JAMSC-120DAO83000 100/200 VAC
Output Module
100/200-VAC 16-point JAMSC-120DAO84300 100/200 VAC
Output Module
Relay Contact JAMSC-120DRA84300 100/200 VAC
16-point Output Module
(AC loads)

b) Use a low-noise AC power supply. If noise is a problem, use an insulation trans-

former or a noise filter.
c) Heed the following precautions when supplying AC power.

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

d) Heed the following precautions when mounting or removing Modules while the
power is being supplied. For a description of hot swapping and for an example of
safety switch settings, refer to 7.2 Hot Swapping.

CAUTION When inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while the AC power supply is turned
ON, install a safety switch for each Module and always turn this safety switch OFF to
turn OFF the AC power supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while AC power is being supplied may

result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

6-14
6.2 Panel Wiring

Inserting or removing a Relay Contact Output Module while AC power is being

supplied may result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

EXAMPLE Example 1: Input Signal Power Supply for 100-VAC 16-point Input Module

JAMSC-120DAI54300
Input device
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Common 1
Not connected
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
6
Input 16
Common 2
Not connected
Input signal power supply
(single-phase, 100 VAC,
50/60 Hz)

Fig. 6.1 Input Signal Power Supply

6-15
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.2 Wiring AC I/O Modules

Example 2: Load Driving Power Supply for 100/200 VAC 16-point Output Module

JAMSC-120DAO84300
Fuse Load
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Common 1-1
Common 1-2 Fuse Load
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Common 2-1
Common 2-2
Load driving power
supply(single-phase,
100/200 VAC, 50/60 Hz)

Fig. 6.2 Load Driving Power Supply

2) AC Power Supply Cables

CAUTION Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.

Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures and/
or malfunctions.

a) Five types of AC I/O Modules are available. See Table 6.4.

To connect these I/O Modules to an AC power supply, use recommended size of
cable listed in Table 6.4. The cables differ in their allowable current capacity
depending on the conditions of use, such as the ambient operating temperature, so
check the conditions of use and select a cable of appropriate size.

Table 6.4 Power Supply Cable Size

Name Model No. Power Supply Cable Size

100-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI54300 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to 1.3 mm2
200-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI74300 (AWG16)
100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module JAMSC-120DAO83000
100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module JAMSC-120DAO84300 1.3 mm2 (AWG16) or larger
Relay Contact 16-point Output Module JAMSC-120DRA84300 AC loads:
1.3 mm2 (AWG16) or larger

b) M3 Phillips screws are used in the external connection terminals. Use crimp termi-
nals that are specially designed for M3 Phillips screws for the Module end of the
power supply cable.

6-16
6.2 Panel Wiring

3) I/O Signal Cables

CAUTION Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.

Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures and/
or malfunctions.

a) There are five types of AC I/O Modules. See Table 6.5.

To connect these I/O Modules to signal line, use I/O signal cable of the size listed in
Table 6.5. The cables differ in their permissible current capacity depending on the
conditions of use, such as the ambient operating temperature, so check the condi-
tions of use and select a cable of appropriate size.

Table 6.5 I/O Signal Cable Size

Name Model No. I/O Signal Cable Size

100-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI54300 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to 1.3 mm2
200-VAC 16-point Input Module JAMSC-120DAI74300 (AWG16)
100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module JAMSC-120DAO83000
100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module JAMSC-120DAO84300 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to 1.3 mm2
(AWG16)
Common cable: 1.3 mm2
(AWG16) or larger
Relay Contact 16-point Output Module JAMSC-120DRA84300 AC loads:
0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to 1.3 mm2
(AWG16)
Common cable: 1.3 mm2
(AWG16) or larger 6
b) M3 Phillips screws are used in the external connection terminals. Accordingly, use
crimp terminals for M3 Phillips screws for the Module-end of I/O signal cable.

4) Protective Fuses
CAUTION If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications in
series with the load.

• 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO83000

• 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300
• Relay Contact 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84300
If a fuse is not connected, a fire or damage to the device or output circuit may occur if
the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules

This section explains how to connect a power supply cable and an I/O signal cable
to a DC I/O Module.

1) DC Power Supply Specifications

a) As shown in Examples 1 and 2 later in this section, it is necessary to supply external
DC power (12/24VDC) to the DC I/O Modules listed in the following table to power
input signals and drive loads.

6-17
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules

Table 6.6 DC I/O Modules Requiring External DC Power Supply

Name Model No. External Power Supply Specifications

12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDI34300 Rated voltage: 12/24 VDC
Input Module Maximum allowable voltage: 30 VDC
12/24-VDC 32-point JAMSC-120DDI35400 Standard operating range:
ON voltage range: 9 VDC
Input Module
OFF voltage range: 5 VDC
12/24-VDC 64-point JAMSC-120DDI36400
Input Module
12/24-VDC 8-point JAMSC-120DDO33000 Rated voltage: 12/24 VDC
Output Module Allowable voltage range: 10.2 to 30.0 VDC
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDO34310
Output Module
(sinking)
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDO34320
Output Module
(sourcing)
12/24-VDC 32-point JAMSC-120DDO35410
Output Module
(sinking)
12/24-VDC 64-point JAMSC-120DDO36410
Output Module
(sinking)
Relay Contact 16-point JAMSC-120DRA84300 Rated voltage: 24 VDC
Output Module Maximum load voltage: 125 VDC
(DC loads) Minimum load voltage: 100 mVDC

b) Use a regulated DC power supply for DC power. When a simple direct current such
as full wave rectification must be used, attach a smoothing capacitor to reduce ripple
as much as possible and heed the following:
(1) Instantaneous output voltage including ripple must always be within the follow-
ing ranges:
• DC Input Modules: 9 to 30 VDC

• DC Output Modules: 10.2 to 30 VDC

• Relay Contact Output Modules: 100 mV to 125 VDC

(2) Output voltage must not exceed the following voltages, even momentarily,
including when the power is turned ON or OFF.
• DC Input Modules: 30 VDC

• DC Output Modules: 30 VDC

• Relay Contact Output Modules: 125 VDC

(3) Attach a noise filter in front of the rectifying element to prevent surge voltage
from rushing inside.
(4) When connecting electromagnetic contactors to the output of full wave rectifier
circuits, prevent surge voltage by attaching a surge suppressor between the
outputs on the I/O Module side of the electromagnetic connectors.

6-18
6.2 Panel Wiring

Example 1: Input Signal Power Supply for 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module
EXAMPLE
JAMSC-120DDI34300
Input device
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Common 1

12/24 VDC Not connected

Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
Common 2
Not connected
12/24 VDC Input
signal power supply

Fig. 6.3 Input Signal Power Supply

Example 2: Load Driving Power Supply for 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module (sink)
JAMSC-120DDO34310
Fuse Load
6
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
-Common 1
12/24 VDC
+Common 1
Fuse Load
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12

Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Load driving
-Common 2 power supply
+Common 2 12/24 VDC

Fig. 6.4 Load Driving Power Supply

6-19
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules

2) Power Supply Cables and I/O Signal Cables for DC I/O Modules with
Terminal Blocks
CAUTION Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.

Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures and/
or malfunctions.

a) There are five DC I/O Modules with terminal blocks for external connections. See
Table 6.7.
b) To connect these DC I/O Modules, use power supply cable and I/O signal cable of
the size listed in Table 6.7. The cables differ in their permissible current capacity
depending on the conditions of use, such as the ambient operating temperature, so
check the conditions of use and select a cable of appropriate size.

Table 6.7 I/O Signal Cable Size

Name Model No. I/O Signal Cable Size

12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDI34300 0.2mm2 (AWG24) to 0.8mm2 (AWG18)
Input Module
12/24-VDC 8-point JAMSC-120DDO33000
Output Module
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDO34310
Output Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC-120DDO34320
Output Module (sourcing)
Relay Contact 16-point JAMSC-120DRA84300 DC loads: 0.2mm2 (AWG24) to 0.8mm2 (AWG18)
Output Module
(DC loads)

c) M3 Phillips screws are used in the external connection terminals. Accordingly, crimp
terminals for M3 Phillips screws may be used for terminals on the I/O Module end of
power supply cable and I/O signal cable.
d) When using an insulation transformer, always make sure to separate the primary
and the secondary coils. When using a noise filter, also be sure to separate the pri-
mary and the secondary coils.

3) Power Supply Cables and I/O Signal Cable for DC 32-point I/O Mod-
ule
a) There are two 32-point DC I/O Modules with connectors for external connections.
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400

• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410

b) To connect to these I/O Modules, use of the following I/O signal cables.
• I/O Module cables assembled by the user.

• Yaskawa W0300 32-point I/O Module Cables

• Yaskawa W0302 32-point I/O Module Cables

• Yaskawa W0301 32-point I/O Module Cables

6-20
6.2 Panel Wiring

c) If I/O signal cables are assembled by the user, use the following electric cables and
connectors:

• Cable size: 0.08 mm2 (AWG28)

• Module side connector: 10140-6000EL+10340-55S0-008-F (3M)

d) When an W0300 32-point I/O Module Cable is used, select the appropriate cable
from the three cables shown in the following table:

Table 6.8 W0300 32-point I/O Module Cables

Item Specifications
Name W0300 Cable
Model Name W0300-01 W0300-03 W0300-05
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0300-01 JZMSZ-120W0300-03 JZMSZ-120W0300-05
Length (L) 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Specifications Shielded cable of 40 conductors, corresponding to UL20276, AWG28
(0.08mm2)
Terminals Module Side Connector: 10140-6000EL+10340-55S0-008-F (3M)
External Loose wires; Cable length: 150mm, pin number labeled on each wire
Device Side

As shown in the following figure, the external device side of the W0300 cable is
divided into individual wires. The cable size is 0.08mm2.

Connector (Module side) Loose wires

Model name
(external device side)
6
Pin number is attached to each wire.

Shielded cable 40-core

loose wires

150 mm

e) When a W0302 32-point I/O Module cable is used, select the appropriate cable from
the three cables shown in the following table:

Table 6.9 W0302 32-point I/O Module Cables

Item Specifications
Name W0302 Cable
Model Name W0302-01 W0302-03 W0302-05
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0302-01 JZMSZ-120W0302-03 JZMSZ-120W0302-05
Length (L) 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Specifications Shielded cable of 40 conductors, corresponding to UL20276, AWG28
(0.2mm2)
Terminals Module Side Connector: 10140-6000EL+10640-5500-008 (3M)
External Loose wires; Cable length: 150mm, pin number labeled on each wire
Device Side

6-21
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules

As shown in the following figure, the external device side of the W0302 cable is
divided into individual wires. The cable size is 0.2mm2.

Connector (Module side)

Model name Loose wires

(external device side)
Pin number is attached to each wire.

Shielded cable
40-core
loose wires

f) When a W0301 32-point I/O Module cable is used, select the appropriate cable from
the three cables shown in the following table:

Table 6.10 W0301 32-point I/O Module Cables

Item Specifications
Name W0301 Cable
Model Name W0301-01 W0301-03 W0301-05
Model No. JZMSZ-120W0301-01 JZMSZ-120W0301-03 JZMSZ-120W0301-05
Length (L) 1.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m
Cable Specifications Shielded cable of 40 conductors, corresponding to UL20276, AWG28
(0.08mm2)
Terminals Module Side Connector: 10140-6000EL+10640-5500-008 (manufactured by SUMIT-
OMO 3M Ltd.)
External Connector: FCN-361J040-AU+FCN-360C040-E (manufactured by Fujitsu
Device Side Ltd.)

As shown in the following figure, the external device side of the W0301 cable is
equipped with a connector.

Connector 1 (Module side)

Connector 2
Model name (external device side)

Shielded cable

6-22
6.2 Panel Wiring

As shown in Fig. 6.5, W0301 is to be connected to a Connector Terminal Block. One

of the Connector Terminal Blocks that can be used is the OMRON XW2B-40F5-P.
The following table shows the specifications of the XW2B-40F5-P.

Table 6.11 Specifications of XW2B-40F5-P

Item Specifications
Model No. XW2B-40F5-P
Connector FCN-364P040-AU (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
External Connection Terminal block with M3.5 screw terminals
Structure Wall mounting type
Approx. Mass 200 g
External Dimensions 216.5 × 45 × 43mm (W × H × D)

XW2B-40F5-P
Connector
Terminal Block

W0301 Cable
Connector 1
(Module side) Connector 2
(external device side)

Shielded cable

Fig. 6.5 Connecting W0301 Cable to XW2B-40F5-P Connector Terminal Block

g) When using an insulation transformer for the primary side of DC voltage stabilizing
power supply, always make sure to separate the primary and the secondary coils.
When using a noise filter, also be sure to separate the primary and the secondary
coils.

4) Power Supply Cables and I/O Signal Cable for DC 64-point I/O Mod-
ules
a) Two 64-point DC I/O Modules with connectors for external connections are avail-
able.
• 12/24VDC 64-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400

• 12/54VDC 64-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410

b) Use one of the following cables for the I/O signal line to be connected to the I/O
Modules.
• I/O Module cable assembled by the user

• Yaskawa 64-point I/O Module Cable W5410

6-23
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.3 Wiring DC I/O Modules

c) Use the following electric wires and connectors to assemble I/O signal cables to con-
nect to these Digital I/O Modules:

• Cable size: 0.26mm2 (AWG23)

• Module side connector (provided as accessory):

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (soldered) (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)

d) If a W5410 64-point I/O Module Cable is used, select the appropriate cable from the
following table.

Table 6.12 W5410 64-point I/O Module Cables

Item Specifications
Name W5410 Cable
Model Name W5410-05 W5410-10 W5410-30
Model No. JEPMC-W5410-05 JEPMC-W5410-10 JEPMC-W5410-30
Length (L) 0.5m 1.0m 3.0m
Cable Specifications Shielded cable of 40 conductors, AWG24 (0.20 mm2)
Terminals Module Side Connector: FCN-363J-040 (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
FCN-360C040-B (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
FCN-363J-AU/R (manufactured by Fujitsu Ltd.)
External Loose wires; Cable length: 100 mm, pin number labeled on each wire
device Side

As shown in the following figure, the external-device end of the W5410 cable has
loose wires. The size of each wire is 0.20 mm2.

Connector (Module side) Loose wires (external-device side)

A pin number label is on
Model name each loose wire.

Shielded cable
40-core
loose wires

L 100 mm

e) If using an insulation transformer for the primary side of the DC-voltage stabilizing
power supply, make sure to separate the primary and the secondary coils. If using a
noise filter, also be sure to separate the primary and the secondary coils.

6-24
6.2 Panel Wiring

5) Protective Fuses
CAUTION If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications in
series with the load.

• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sink): Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34310

• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (source): Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34320
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (sink): Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410
• 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module (sink): Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410
• Relay Contact 16-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84300
If a fuse is not connected, a fire or damage to the device or output circuit may
occur if the load is short-circuited or the circuit overloaded.

6.2.4 Wiring Analog I/O Modules

This section explains the connection of an I/O signal cable to an Analog I/O Module.

1) I/O Signal Cables

CAUTION Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.
Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures and/
or malfunctions.

CAUTION Ground the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire that connects to the Analog I/O
Module to one point (a resistance of 100 Ω max.).

Not grounding the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire may result in malfunc-
6
tion of the GL120 and GL130.

a) There are seven types of Analog I/O Modules. See Table 6.13.
b) To connect these I/O Modules to signal line, use I/O signal cables of the size listed in
Table 6.13. The cables differ in their allowable current capacity depending on the
conditions of use, such as the ambient operating temperature, so check the condi-
tions of use and select a cable of appropriate size.

Table 6.13 I/O Signal Cable Size

Name Model No. I/O Signal Cable Size

Analog Input Modules (±10V, 4 channel) JAMSC-120AVI02000 Shielded twisted-pair wires
Analog Input Modules (0 to 10V, 4 channel) JAMSC-120AVI02100 0.5 mm2 (AWG20) to 1.3
Analog Input Modules (4 to 20 mA, 4 channel) JAMSC-120ACI02000 mm2 (AWG16)

Analog Output Modules (±10V, 2 channel) JAMSC-120AVO01000

Analog Output Modules (0 to 10V, 2 channel) JAMSC-120AVO01100
Analog Output Modules (0 to 5V, 2 channel) JAMSC-120AVO01200
Analog Output Modules (4 to 20 mA, 2 channel) JAMSC-120ACO01000

c) M3 Phillips screws are used in the external connection terminals. Use crimp termi-
nals that are specially designed for M3 Phillips screws for the Module end of the I/O
signal cable.

6-25
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.4 Wiring Analog I/O Modules

2) Wiring the Analog Input Module (±10V, 4 channel)

a) Connecting Differential Signal Source
(1) Connect + side of a differential signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect - side of a differential signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
(3) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the
Module.
(4) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire on the signal source side to
0V of the differential signal source.
Incorrect connection will make the input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
b) Connecting Single-ended Signal Source
(1) Connect + side of a singe-ended signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect - side of a single-ended signal to “-” terminal of the Module,
(3) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the
Module and short “Shield” terminal to “-” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
c) For an unused input circuit, short its “+” terminal to “-” terminal and also short one of
these terminals to its “Shield” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
d) Refer to 6.2.5 Grounding for the grounding of Analog Input Modules.
Note: There is no isolation provided between the various input circuit channels.
If isolation between channels is required, use a commercial isolation ampli-
fier for each channel.

3) Wiring the Analog Input Modules (0 to 10V, 4 channel)

a) Connecting Single-ended Signal Source
(1) Connect the “+” side of a single-ended signal to the “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect the “-” side of a single-ended signal to the “-” terminal of the Module.
(3) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the
Module and short the “Shield” terminal to the “-” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
b) For an unused input circuit, short its “+” terminal to “-” terminal and also short one of
these terminals to its “Shield” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
c) Refer to 6.2.5 Grounding for the grounding of Analog Input Modules.
Note: Isolation between Input Channels
There is no isolation provided between the various input circuit channels.
If isolation between channels is required, use a commercial isolation ampli-
fier for each channel.

6-26
6.2 Panel Wiring

4) Wiring the Analog Input Modules (4 to 20 mA, 4 channel)

a) Connecting Current Signal Source
(1) Connect + side of a current signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect - side of a current signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
(3) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the
Module and short “Shield” terminal, “S” terminal, and “-” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make the input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
b) Connecting Voltage Signal Source
(1) Connect + side of a voltage signal to “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect - side of a voltage signal to “-” terminal of the Module.
(3) Connect the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire to “Shield” terminal of the
Module and short “Shield” terminal to “-” terminal. Open “S” terminal of the
Module.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
c) For an unused input circuit, short its “+” terminal to “-” terminal and also short one of
these terminal to its “Shield” terminal.
Incorrect connection will make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.
d) Refer to 6.2.5 Grounding for the grounding of Analog Input Modules.
Note: Isolation between Input Channels
There is no isolation provided between the various input circuit channels.
If isolation between channels is required, use a commercial isolation ampli-
fier for each channel.
6
5) Wiring the Analog Output Modules
a) Connecting Output Signals
(1) Connect + side of a load to “+” terminal of the Module.
(2) Connect “-” side of a load to “-” terminal of the Module.
(3) Ground the shield of a shielded twisted-pair wire at one point either on the load
side or on the Module side.
Incorrect connection may make output signal unstable and cause malfunction.
b) Grounding Shield of a Shielded Twisted-pair Wire
(1) Normally, ground the shield at one point on the load side. However, better out-
put characteristics may be obtained by grounding the shield on the Module side
rather than on the load side. Choose the best method for the situation.
(2) The FG terminal of the Module is connected to the Mounting Base via the Mod-
ule. When grounding on the Module side, use the FG terminal.
Use the terminals not connected inside the Module as relay terminals.
Incorrect connection may make output signal unstable and cause malfunction.
(3) Refer to 6.2.5 Grounding for the grounding of Analog Output Modules.

6-27
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.5 Grounding

6.2.5 Grounding

1) Grounding the Analog Input Modules

CAUTION Do not allow foreign matter such as cable chips in the Modules or Mounting Bases.
Foreign matter in the Modules or Mounting Bases may cause fire, failures, and/
or malfunctions.

CAUTION Ground the ground terminal of the Analog Input Module to a resistance of 100 Ω max.
Not grounding the ground terminal may result in malfunction of the GL120 and
GL130.

a) Connect the ground terminal (FG) and the ground terminal of the control panel (E)
with 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) to 2.5 mm2 (AWG13) cable (in-panel ground cable.)
b) If more than one Analog Input Module is used, do not cross-wire between the ground
terminals. Connect the ground terminal of each Analog Input Module to the ground
terminal of the control panel separately, as shown in the following figure.
c) M3 Phillips screws are used on the field wiring terminals. Accordingly, use crimp ter-
minals for M3 Phillips screws for the in-panel ground cable ends.

Field wiring terminal of Field wiring terminal of

Power Supply Module Analog Input Module

AC1 CH1+

AC2 CH1-
ACG Shield 1
FG FG

In-panel ground cable

In-panel ground cable
(1.5 to 2.5 mm2)
(1.5 to 2.5 mm2)

Control panel
Ground terminal (E) Outside-panel ground
cable (8 mm2 or lager)

Ground pole
(with a resistance of 100 Ω max.)

Fig. 6.6 Grounding for Analog Input Module

6-28
6.2 Panel Wiring

2) Grounding the Analog Input Signal Cables

a) Connect the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire to the “Shield” terminal of the
Module.
b) Use a wire of the following specifications to connect the Analog Input Module ground
terminal (FG) directly to the control panel ground terminal (E).

• Wire size: 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) to 2.5 mm2 (AWG13)

c) When connecting the ground terminals (FG) of several Analog Input Modules, also
use a wire of the above specifications to connect the Analog Input Module ground
terminal (FG) to the control panel ground terminal (E). Do not cross wires between
the Analog Input Module ground terminals.

Incorrect connection may make input signal unstable and cause malfunction.

3) Grounding the Analog Output Signal Cables

a) As a rule, ground the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire to one point on the load
side. Better output characteristics, however, may be obtained by grounding it at one
point on the Module side. Ground according to the actual situation.
b) Ground the shield of the shielded twisted-pair wire to an unused terminal of the Ana-
log Output Module. Unused terminals are used as relay terminals.
c) Use a wire of the following specifications to connect the unused terminals, to which
the shield is grounded, directly to the control panel ground terminal (E).

• Wire size: 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) to 2.5 mm2 (AWG13)

6
d) When connecting the unused terminals of several Analog Output Modules, to which
the shields are grounded, also use a wire of the above specifications to connect
these unused terminals directly to the control panel ground terminal (E). Do not
cross wires between the Analog Output Module ground terminals.

Incorrect connection may make output signal unstable and cause malfunction.

6-29
6 Installation and Wiring
6.2.5 Grounding

4) Grounding the Control Panel

a) Connect the ground terminal of the control panel and the ground pole with a cable
(outside-panel ground cable) of 8 mm2 (AWG8) or larger. Make sure that the length
of this ground cable is as short as possible.
b) Use a ground pole with a resistance of 100 Ω max. Do not use together with ground
cables or ground poles of high-voltage electrical devices.
The following figure shows an example of the ground cable connection.

Analog Input Module

EXAMPLE field wiring terminal

Shield 1

In-panel ground cable

Power Supply Module
field wiring terminal
Analog Output Module
field wiring terminal

Not connected
(junction terminals)

In-panel ground cable

In-panel ground cable
(Connect when necessary)
(1.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)

Control panel
Ground terminal (E)
Outside-panel ground cable (8 mm2 or lager)

Ground pole (with a resistance of 100 Ω max.)

Fig. 6.7 Ground Cable Connection Example

5) Grounding Method
a) Dedicated Ground
As a rule, the Modules forming the GL120 or GL130 should be grounded to an inde-
pendent ground pole at a ground resistance of 100 Ω max.
b) Common Ground Pole
The Modules forming the GL120 or GL130 and devices related to general control
circuits can share a common ground pole. Do not, however, share the same ground
pole between GL120 or GL130 Modules and power devices.
c) Common Ground Line
The Modules forming the GL120 or GL130 and devices related to general control
circuits cannot share a common outside-panel ground cable.

6-30
6.3 External Wiring

6.3 External Wiring

This section describes the basic external wiring procedure for Digital I/O Modules.

6.3.1 External Wiring for Digital I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.3.1 External Wiring for Digital I/O Modules

1) Selection and Separation of Digital I/O Signal Cables

The digital I/O signal cable used for external wiring for Digital I/O Modules must be
selected according to the operating environment, including the mechanical strength,
effects of electric noise, voltage used, etc. Use the following table to select and sep-
arate appropriate I/O signal cables.

Table 6.14 Wiring Procedures for Digital I/O Signal Cables

Wiring Length Procedures

30 m or less a) A DC output signal line, a DC input signal line, an AC output signal line, and an AC
input signal line may be housed in the same cable.
b) DC I/O signal lines and AC I/O signal lines must be housed in separate cables.
30 to 300 m a) Each DC output signal line, DC input signal line, AC output signal line, and AC input
signal line must be housed in a separate cable.
b) If the induction voltage is large, attach either dummy resistance, or use a separate
fully shielded cable and ground the shield on the GL120 and GL130 end.
300 m or longer a) Considering the inrush current to Output Module, the length of cable must be 300 m
or less.
b) When the wiring length is more than 300 m, install a junction relay in between so that 6
the length between the junction relay and the control panel is not more than 30 m.

2) Laying Digital I/O Signal Cables

I/O signal cables connected to Digital I/O Modules must be separated form general
control circuit cables and power circuit cables as much as possible.

Leave 10 cm or more between digital I/O signal cables and a general control circuit
cables, and 20 cm or more between digital I/O signal cables and power circuit
cables. If separation is not possible, then use fully shielded cables, or as shown in
the following figure, take measures such as separating them by way of iron plate
separators.

EXAMPLE Steel-plate separator

Power Pulse input

circuit General control Digital I/O Analog I/O signal
cables circuit cables signal cables signal cables cables

6-31
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.1 AC Input Modules

6.4 Precautions on Wiring

This section describes precautions when using 120-series I/O Modules.

6.4.1 AC Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32

6.4.2 AC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
6.4.3 DC Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
6.4.4 DC Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
6.4.5 Connections between AC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-49
6.4.6 Connections between DC I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.7 Analog Input Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
6.4.8 Analog Output Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
6.4.9 External Power Supplies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52

6.4.1 AC Input Modules

1) Power Supply Phasing for Input Signals

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

100 VAC
(200 VAC)

Input 1

Input 8

Common 1

Input 9
Connect power
supply with the
same phase.
Input 16
Common 2

Fig. 6.8 Power Supply Phasing for Input Signals

2) Connecting Inductive Loads

CAUTION If connecting an inductive load in parallel with AC Input Module, connect the surge
absorber in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a surge absorber may result in damage to the AC Input Mod-
ule.

6-32
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

Although the capacity of surge absorber must be adjusted to the load, the following
surge absorber is recommended for general applications:

• CR50500 (manufactured by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.) or equivalent

Surge absorber
100 VAC
(200 VAC)
Inductive load

Input

Common

Fig. 6.9 Connecting Inductive Loads

3) Long Wiring Runs from Input Devices

When long wiring is required for connection to external devices or when a large
induced voltage is generated due to a nearby inductive source, a dummy resistor
should be connected in parallel with the AC Input Module to suppress the induced
voltage. 6
If the dummy resistor is not connected, the input signal may become unstable and
malfunction will occur.

Although the size of dummy resistor must be adjusted to the inductive voltage, the
following surge values are recommended for general applications:

• At 100 VAC: 5kΩ (10W min.)

• At 200VAC: 10kΩ (20W min.)

100 VAC Dummy resistor

(200 VAC)

Long distance

Input

Common

Fig. 6.10 Long Wiring Runs from Input Devices

6-33
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.1 AC Input Modules

4) Leakage Current from Input Devices

When connecting an input device that exhibits leakage current during the OFF state
(such as non-contact switches or limit switches with neon lamps) to an AC Input
Module, the leakage current may be too large to stay within the OFF voltage range
and the input signal may never go OFF.

The following diagram shows what can happen when a non-contact switch with a 5-
mA leakage current is connected to the AC Input Module (100 VAC).

Input device AC Input Module

(non-contact switch)
Input

Leakage current = 5 mA
Input impedance
Zi

Common
Power supply
for input signals
(74 to 132 VAC)

Fig. 6.11 Leakage Current from Input Devices

The input voltage Vi Input to the AC Input Module by a leakage current of 5 mA can
be calculated as follows:

Vi = 5 mA × Zi = 5 mA × 14.3 k = 72 V

This voltage will not go below 30 V as required by the OFF voltage range of the
input conditions, so the input signal will not go OFF.

Here, a dummy resistor can be connected in parallel with the input teminals of the
AC Input Module to correct the problem.

Input device AC Input Module

(non-contact switch)
Input

Dummy resistor Input impedance

Common
Power supply
for input signal
(74 to 132 VAC)

Fig. 6.12 Connecting a Dummy Resistor

The resistance of the dummy resistor must be selected so that the voltage Vi input
to the AC Input Module is 30 V or less.

R × Zi × Leakage current < 30 V

R + Zi
R × 14.3 kΩ × 5 mA < 30 V
R + 14.3 kΩ
∴ R < 10.3 kΩ

Therefore, the resistance of the dummy resistor must be 10.3 kΩ or less.

6-34
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

If the resistance is too small, the amount of heat generation will increase, and a high
wattage will be required. Here, the wattage for a dummy resistor of 10 kΩ is calcu-
lated.

The wattage of the dummy resistor is as follows:

(Power supply voltage) 2 (100 V) 2

W= R = =1W
10 kΩ

Normally, about three times the computed value is used to allow surplus wattage. A
3-W resistor would terefore be used.

6.4.2 AC Output Modules

1) Power Supply Phasing for Output Signals

CAUTION Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and common 2 of the
AC I/O Module.

If power supplies of different phases are connected, overheating or fire may

occur.

100 VAC
(200 VAC)

Fuses Loads
Output 1
6
Output 8
Common 1-1

Common 1-2

Output 9
Connect power Connect power
supply with the supply with the
same phase. same phase
Output 16
Common 2-1

Common 2-2

Fig. 6.13 Power Supply Phasing for Output Signals

6-35
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.2 AC Output Modules

2) Protective Fuses
CAUTION If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications in
series with the load.

The built-in fuse protects the Output Module from damage that may occur in the fol-
lowing cases:

• When over-voltage is applied to the load driving power supply terminal of the
Output Module.

• When foreign matter such as chips are in the Output Module and short-circuiting
the internal circuits.

Not installing external fuses may cause fire and damage to the output circuit and the
Module if an over-voltage or short-circuit occurs.

200 VAC
(100 VAC)

Fuses Loads
Output

Output

Common 1-1

Common 1-2

Fig. 6.14 Protective Fuses

3) Connecting Contacts to an Inductive Load

CAUTION If connecting an inductive load to the AC Output Module, connect the surge absorber
in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a surge absorber may result in damage to the AC Output

Module.

6-36
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

Although the capacity of the surge absorber used must be adjusted to the load, the
following surge absorber is recommended for general applications:

• CR50500 (manufactured by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.) or equivalent.

100 VAC Surge absorber

(200 VAC)

Inductive
load
Output
Load
Output

Common
1-1

Common
1-2

Fig. 6.15 Connecting Contacts to an Inductive Load

4) Maximum Load Current

CAUTION Although a 0.6-A load can be connected to each output point for AC 16-point Output
Module, the total load must be 2.4 A or less for each common. Keep the maximum
load at 2.4-A for each common.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

6
100 VAC
(200 VAC) 0.6 A/point

Fuses Loads
Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

2.4 A/common

Fuse
Common 1-2
Common 1-1

Fig. 6.16 Maximum Load Current

6-37
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.2 AC Output Modules

5) Minimum Switching Voltage/Current

A triac is used for the output switch of AC output Modules. Since a triac cannot
operate stably if the load is less than the specified minimum switching voltage/cur-
rent, be sure to use a load with a rated current level higher than the minimum
switching voltage/current.

If the minimum switching voltage/current cannot be maintained, connect a dummy

resistor in parallel with the load so that the total switching voltage/current is higher
than the minimum switching voltage/current.

100 VAC Dummy resistor

(200 VAC)

Light load
Output
Load
Output

Common
1-1

Common
1-2

Fig. 6.17 Minimum Switching Voltage/Current

6) Leakage Current from Output Modules

Leakage current flows from an AC Output Module when the Module is OFF, and a
light load, such as a relay, connected to the AC Module may turn OFF because of
the leakage current.

The following diagram shows a load device with the load impedance is 6 kΩ con-
nected to an AC Output Module. This load will not turn OFF due to the leakage cur-
rent of 3 mA.

AC Output Module Load device

Output

Leakage current = 3 mA
Load impedance
ZL

Common
Load power supply
(100/200 VAC)

Fig. 6.18 Leakage Current from Output Modules

6-38
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

Here, a dummy resistor can be connected in parallel with the input load to correct
the problem.

AC Output Module Load device

Output

Dummy Load impedance

resistor ZL

Common
Load power supply
(100/200 VAC)

Assuming that the load will operate properly with a leakage current of 1.5 mA or
less, then the value of the dummy resistor R can be computed as follows:

3 mA × R < 1.5 mA
R + 6 kΩ
∴ R < 6 kΩ

Thus, the value for R should be 6 kΩ or less.

If the resistance is too small, the amount of heat generation will increase, and a high
wattage will be required. Here, we will compute the wattage for a dummy resistor of
6 kΩ.

(Power supply voltage) 2 (100 V) 2

W= R = = Approx. 1.7 W
6 kΩ
6
Normally, about three times the computed value is used to allow surplus wattage.
A 5-W resistor would thus be used.

7) Connecting Solenoids with Diodes

Some solenoids used as the load of the AC Output Module may contain built-in
diodes.

Solenoids with diodes have an advantage in that they are driven by half-wave recti-
fication and thus require a lower activation current.

Abide by the following precautions when such diodes are used as a load for an AC
Output Module.

a) Overvoltage can be applied to the load when the output is OFF. The rectifying diode
must therefore be able to withstand a reverse voltage of 2 2 E or greater.
AC Output Module Solenoid
Rectifier diode
Output

Leakage current = 5 mA Flywheel

diode

Common
Load power supply
(100/200 VAC)

Fig. 6.19 Solenoids with Diode (1)

6-39
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.3 DC Input Modules

When the output of the AC Output Module is OFF, the rectifying diode is forward
biased and current A flows, as indicated by the dotted line in the figure, for a half the
cycle of the power supply to charge the capacitor. In the next half cycle, the rectify-
ing diode is reverse biased and blocks current A, so that discharge current B flows
from the capacitor. Here, the supply voltage and the voltage charge on the capacitor
are superimposed, and are applied to the solenoid. The peak value for this voltage is
about 2 2 E (E: supply voltage). This is why the rectifying diode requires to with-
stand a reverse voltage of 2 2 E or more.
Connect a resistance ranging from multiples of ten to several hundred kΩ on both
ends of the solenoid to reduce the voltage applied to the solenoid.

AC Output Module Solenoid

Output Rectifier diode

Flywheel
diode
Dummy
resistor

Common
Load power supply
(100/200 VAC)

Fig. 6.20 Solenoids with Diode (2)

b) The solenoid may not turn ON even though the output is ON.
When a solenoid with a diaode is connected, the solenoid may not turn ON because
the voltage at the output is not reduced to a usable operationg level due to the volt-
age charge on the capacitor. Here again, connect a resistance ranging from multi-
ples of ten to several hundred kΩ on both ends of the solenoid to reduce the voltage
applied to the solenoid.

6.4.3 DC Input Modules

1) Connecting Inductive Loads

CAUTION If connecting an inductive load in parallel with DC Input Module, connect the flywheel
diode in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Input Mod-
ule.

Although the capacity of flywheel diode used must be adjusted to the load, the fol-
lowing diode is recommended for general applications:

• H14-series Diode (manufactured by Hitachi Ltd.) or equivalent

6-40
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

12 VDC Flywheel diode

(24 VDC)

Inductive load

Input

Common

Fig. 6.21 Connecting Inductive Loads (Sourcing Inputs)

12 VDC Flywheel diode

(24 VDC)

Inductive load

Input

Input 6
Common

Fig. 6.22 Connecting Inductive Loads (Sinking Inputs)

2) Leakage Current from Input Devices

When connecting an input device that exhibits leakage current during the OFF state
(such as limit switch with LEDs) to a DC Input Module, the leakage current may be
too large to stay within the OFF voltage range and the input signal may never go
OFF.

The following diagram shows when a LED-equipped limit switch with a 3-mA leak-
age current is connected to the Input Module (12/24 VDC, 16-point).

Input device DC Input Module

(limit switch with LED)
Input

Leakage current = 3 mA
Input impedance
Zi

Common
Power supply
for input signal
(12/24 VDC)

6-41
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.3 DC Input Modules

Fig. 6.23 Leakage Current from Input Devices (1)

The input voltage Vi input to the DC Input Module by a leakage current of 3 mA can
be calculated as follows:

Vi = 3 mA × Zi = 3 mA × 3.0 kΩ = 9.0 V

This voltage will not go below 5 V as required by the OFF voltage range of the input
conditions, so the input signal will not go OFF.

Here, a dummy resistor can be connected in parallel with the input terminals of the
DC Input Module to correct the problem.

Input device DC Input Module

(limit switch with an LED)
Input

Dummy resistor Input impedance

Common
Power supply
for input signal
(12/24 VDC)

Fig. 6.24 Leakage Current from Input Devices (2)

The resistance of the dummy resistor must be selected so that the voltage Vi input
to the DC Input Module is 5 V or less.

R × Zi × Leakage current < 5 V

R + Zi
R × 3.0 kΩ × 3 mA < 5 V
R + 3.0 kΩ
∴ R < 3.75 kΩ

Thus, the value for R should be 3.75 kΩ or less.

If the resistance is too small, the amount of heat generation will increase, and a high
wattage will be required. Here, the wattage for a dummy resistor of 3 kΩ is calcu-
lated.

The wattage of the dummy resistor is as follows:

(Power supply voltage) 2 (24 V) 2

W= R = = Approx. 190 mW
3 kΩ

Normally, about three times the computed value is used to allow surplus wattage.
A 0.5- to 1-W resistor would thus be used.

6-42
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

3) Connecting DC Input Devices with Different Voltage Ratings

Normally, the power supply voltage of the input device should match that of the DC
Input Module. The following table shows examples of input devices with different
voltage ratings and advises whether or not they may be connected to the DC Input
Module.

Input Device Open collector output (V1 < V2)

Connection Can be connected.

DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply +Common 1 Photocoupler
9

Input device
V1
24 VDC Input

V2
48 VDC

Input Device Output with a diode (V1 < V2)

Connection Can be connected.

DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply +Common 1
9 Photocoupler

Input device

6
V1 Input
24 VDC

V2
48 VDC
Input Device Output with a resistor and LED (V1 < V2)
Connection Cannot be connected. When the input device is OFF, current indicated by the dot-
ted line in the figure on the left may flow, causing the LED
of the input device to glow dimly.
DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply
+Common 1
9
Photocoupler
Input device

V1
24 VDC
Input

V2
48 VDC

6-43
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.3 DC Input Modules

Input Device Open collector output (V1 > V2)

Connection Can be connected. The voltage resistance of the output transistor in the input
device must be 40 V or more.

DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply +Common 1 Photocoupler
9

Input device
V1 Input
24 VDC

V2
12 VDC

Input Device Output with a diode (V1 > V2)

Connection Cannot be connected. When the input device is OFF, current indicated by the dot-
ted line in the figure on the left may flow, and the input may
not turn OFF.

DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply
+Common 1
9
Photocoupler
Input device

V1
24 VDC
Input

V2
12 VDC

Input Device Output with a resistor and LED (V1 > V2)
Connection Cannot be connected. When the input device is OFF, current indicated by the dot-
ted line in the figure on the left may flow and apply reverse
voltage to the LED, possibly damaging the LED.

DC Input Module
V1: Input signal power supply
V2: Input device power supply +Common 1
9
Photocoupler
Input device

V1
24 VDC
Input

V2
12 VDC

6-44
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

6.4.4 DC Output Modules

1) Protective Fuses
CAUTION If using an Output Module, connect a fuse that complies with the load specifications in
series with the load.

The built-in fuse protects the Module from damage that may occur in the following
cases:

• When over-voltage is applied to the load driving power supply terminal of the
Output Module.

• When foreign matter such as chips are in the Output Module and short-circuiting
the internal circuits.

Not installing external fuses may cause fire and damage to the output circuit and the
Module.

12 VDC
(24 VDC)

Fuses Loads 6
Output

Output

-Common 1

+Common 1

Fig. 6.25 Protective Fuses

6-45
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.4 DC Output Modules

2) Connecting Inductive Loads

CAUTION If connecting an inductive load to the DC Output Module, connect the flywheel diode
in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Output

Module.

CAUTION If connecting a contact to an inductive load of the DC Output Module, connect the
flywheel diode in parallel with the inductive load to prevent surge voltage.

Failure to connect a flywheel diode may result in damage to the DC Output

Module.

Although the capacity of flywheel diode must be adjusted to the load, the following
diode is recommended for general applications:

• H14E series Diode (manufactured by Hitachi Ltd.) or equivalent.

12 VDC
(24 VDC) Flywheel diode

Inductive
load
Output
Load
Output

-Common 1

+Common 1

Fig. 6.26 Connceting Inductive Loads

12 VDC
(24 VDC) Flywheel diode

Inductive
load
Output
Load
Output

-Common 1

+Common 1

Fig. 6.27 Connecting Contacts to Inductive Loads

6-46
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

3) Maximum Load Current for 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Modules

CAUTION Although a 0.5-A load can be connected to each output point for the DC 16-point
Output Module, the total load must be 1.0 A or less for each of the four output points in
the same area marked by the shaded portion in the following figure. Keep the load
distribution within the 1.0-A limit.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

12 VDC
(24 VDC)
0.5 A/point

Output 1 Loads
1.0 A/4 points
Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5 Loads

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8
6

Fuse

-Common 1 +Common 1

Fig. 6.28 Maximum Load Current for 16-point Output Modules

6-47
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.4 DC Output Modules

4) Maximum Load Currents for 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module

CAUTION Although a 0.3-A load can be connected to each output point of the DC 32-point
Output Module, the total load must be 0.4 A or less for each of the four output points in
the same area marked by the shaded portion in the following figure. Keep the load
distribution within the 0.4-A limit.

If this limit is exceeded, damage may occur to the output circuit.

12 VDC
(24 VDC) 0.3 A/point

Output 1 Loads
0.4 A/4 points
Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5 Loads

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Fuse

-Common 1 +Common 1

Fig. 6.29 Maximum Load Currents for 32-point Output Module

5) Loads with Large Inrush Current

Connecting a load with a large inrush current, such as incandescent light bulbs,
may cause dark current flow of up to 30 % of the rated current of the incandescent
bulb. Here install a current limiting resistor in series with the load. Be sure to use
this or other methods to keep the inrush current below the maximum load current of
the Output Module.
If the load current exceeds the maximum load current, the output circuit will be dam-
aged.

6-48
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

12 VDC
(24 VDC)

Limiter resistor Light

bulb
Output

Output

-Common 1 Warm-up resistor

+Common 1

Fig. 6.30 Loads with Large Inrush Current

6.4.5 Connections between AC I/O Modules

1) Whenever two or more GL120 or GL130 PLCs are used in a system, connect them as
shown in the following figures to exchange signals between the AC I/O Modules of the
GL120 or GL130. Use AC Input Modules and AC Output Modules with the same volt-
age ratings.

6
100 VAC
(200 VAC)

AC Output Module AC Input Module

Output Input

Common 1-1 Common

Common 1-2

Fig. 6.31 Connections between AC I/O Modules

2) Using GL120 or GL130 in combination with Existing MEMOCON PLCs
When signals are exchanged between existing MEMOCON PLCs and a GL120 or
GL130 PLC through an AC Input Module and an AC Output Module, the following items
must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative.

AC Output Module AC Input Module

1 Rated Voltage Rated Voltage
2 Rated Frequency Rated Frequency
3 Maximum Load Current > Rated Current
4 Minimum Load Current < Rated Current

6-49
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.6 Connections between DC I/O Modules

6.4.6 Connections between DC I/O Modules

1) Whenever two or more GL120 or GL130 PLCs are used in a system, connect them as
shown in the following figure to exchange signals between the DC I/O Modules of the
GL120 or GL130.

12 VDC
(24 VDC)

DC Output Module DC Input Module

Output Input

-Common Common

+Common

Fig. 6.32 Connections between DC I/O Modules

2) Using GL120 or GL130 in Combination with Existing MEMOCON PLCs
When signals are exchanged between existing MEMOCON PLCs and a GL120 or
GL130 PLC through a DC Input Module and a DC Output Module, the following items
must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative.

DC Output Module DC Input Module

1 Rated Voltage Rated Voltage
2 Output Type (Source or Sink) Input Type (Source or Sink)
3 Maximum Load Current > Rated Current
4 Output Voltage Drop < Maximum OFF Voltage Range

6.4.7 Analog Input Modules

1) Input Circuit Insulation

CAUTION Insulation is not provided between the channels of the Analog Input Module.
To insulate all the analog signals connected to the Analog Input Module, use a
commercial isolation amplifier for each channel.

Incorrect connections may cause damages and malfunctions of the Analog

Input Modules.

2) Analog Input Signal Wires

Use Shielded twisted-pair wires for the analog input signal lines. An improper con-
nection will cause noise interference, which results in a malfunction.

6-50
6.4 Precautions on Wiring

3) Grounding Shielded Cables

Connect the shield of the Shielded twisted-pair cable to the “Shield” terminal of the
Module. An improper connection will cause noise interference, which results in a
malfunction.

6.4.8 Analog Output Modules

1) Maximum Load Current (Voltage Output)

CAUTION The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (±10V, 2 channels)
is ±5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result
in damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (0 to10V, 2
channels) is 5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result
in damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

CAUTION The maximum allowable load current for Analog Output Modules (0 to 5V, 2 channels)
is 2.5 mA (2 kΩ). The load resistance must be 2 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result
in damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

2) Maximum Load Resistance (Current Output) 6

CAUTION The maximum allowable load resistance for Analog Output Modules (4 mA to 20 mA,
2 channels) is 550 kΩ). The load resistance must be 550 kΩ or more.

Incorrect connection may cause the output signal to be overloaded, and result
in damages or malfunction of the Analog Output Module.

3) Analog Output Signal Wires

Use shielded twisted-pair cables for the analog output signal lines.
An improper connection will cause noise interference, which results in a malfunc-
tion.

4) Grounding Shielded Cables

As a rule, ground the shield of the shielded twisted-pair cable to one point on the
load side. Better output characteristics, however, may be obtained by connecting it
at one point on the Analog Output Module side, so ground according to the actual
situation.
An improper connection will cause noise interference, which results in a malfunc-
tion.

5) Unused Terminals of the Output Module

The “not connected” terminals inside the Analog Output Modules are not used, so
they can therefore be used as junction terminals.

6-51
6 Installation and Wiring
6.4.9 External Power Supplies

6.4.9 External Power Supplies

1) A standard DC stabilized power supply should be used as an external power supply for
DC I/O Modules.

2) Add a noise filter on the AC input side of the DC stabilized power supply, for special
modules such as Analog Modules or Counter Modules to prevent the introduction of
noise. Do not run the primary and secondary side of the noise filter and the DC output
through the same wiring duct.
3) If a simple DC power supply such as a full-wave rectifying power supply must be used,
minimuze ripple by adding a smoothing capactor, and observe the following precautions.
• Instantaneous output voltage including ripple voltage should always be within
the maximum allowable voltage range of the DC I/O Modules.

• Output voltage, even when power is turned ON and OFF, should never exceed
the maximum allowable voltage of the DC I/O Modules.

• Prevent the introduction of surge voltage by adding a noise filter on the input to
the rectifying device.

• Prevent surge voltage that may occur when a contactor is installed at the full-
wave rectifying output by applying a surege suppressor or other device between
contactor outputs at the Module.

6-52
Maintenance

7
7.1 Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 I/O Modules with Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.2 Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.3 Replacement of Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

7.2 Hot Swapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6

7.2.1 Hot Swapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6

7-1
7 Maintenance
7.1.1 I/O Modules with Built-in Fuses

7.1 Built-in Fuses

This section describes the built-in fuses of the 120-series I/O Modules.

7.1.1 I/O Modules with Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2

7.1.2 Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.3 Replacement of Built-in Fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5

7.1.1 I/O Modules with Built-in Fuses

Fuses are not built in all the 120-series I/O Modules. The fuse blowout detection
and indication function is provided in some of the 120-series Output Modules. The
indicator lamp indicates the fuse state. For replacement of the built-in fuses that
cannot be replaced by users, contact your Yaskawa representative.

The following table shows the Modules with or without built-in fuses, whether the
fuse can be replace or not, and the fuse blowout indication.

Table 7.1 Built-in Fuses

Product Name Model No. Built-in Fuse Fuse Blowout Indicator

Lamp
With/ Replacement
Without
Digital 100/200-VAC 8-point JAMSC- Without − No indication
Output Output Module 120DAO83000
Modules With Prohibited
100/200-VAC JAMSC- “F” is lit when the fuse is
16-point Output Module 120DAO84300 blown out.
12/24-VDC 8-point JAMSC- With Prohibited No indication
Output Module 120DDO33000
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC- With Permitted “F” is lit when the fuse is
Output Module (sinking) 120DDO34310 blown out.
12/24-VDC 16-point JAMSC- With Permitted “F” is lit when the fuse is
Output Module 120DDO34320 blown out.
(sourcing)
12/24-VDC 32-point JAMSC- With Prohibited “F” is lit when the fuse is
Output Module (sinking) 120DDO35410 blown out.
12/24-VDC 64-point JAMSC- With Prohibited “F” is lit when the fuse is
Output Module (sinking) 120DDO36410 blown out.
Relay Contact 16-point JAMSC- Without − No indication
Output Module 120DRA84300
Special Register Input Module JAMSC- With Prohibited “F” is lit when the fuse is
Purpose 120RDI34410 blown out.
Modules With Prohibited
Register Output Module JAMSC- “F” is lit when the fuse is
120RDO34410 blown out.

7-2
7.1 Built-in Fuses

7.1.2 Built-in Fuses

1) AC 16-point Output Modules

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the AC 16-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or a malfunction may occur in the AC 16-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

a) The fuse inside an AC 16-point Output Module is not to protect the output circuit.
The fuse prevents the Module from damage that may occur in the following cases:
• External causes: For example, when over-voltage is applied to the power termi-
nals for driving load of the AC 16-point Output Module.

• Internal causes: For example, when foreign matter such as chips are present in
the AC 16-point Output Module, and thereby short-circuiting the
internal circuits.

b) When the built-in fuses are blown out, the indicator lamp “F” of the AC 16-point Out-
put Module is lit. If the fuses are blown out, eliminate the cause and replace the
Module with a spare AC 16-point Output Module.

2) DC 8-point Output Modules

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 8-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 8-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

7
a) The fuse inside a DC 8-point Output Module is not to protect the output circuit. The
fuse prevents the Module from damage that may occur in the following cases:
• External causes: For example, when over-voltage is applied to the power termi-
nals for driving load of the DC 8-point Output Module.

• Internal causes: For example, when foreign matter such as chips are present in
the DC 8-point Output Module, and thereby short-circuiting the
internal circuits.

b) Neither the fuse blowout detecting circuit nor indication lamp is provided in the DC 8-
point Output Modules.
If the output current does not flow though the rated voltage is applied to the DC 8-
point Output Module and the output signal indicator lamp is lit, the built-in fuse may
be blown out. If the fuse is blown out, eliminate the cause and replace the Module
with a spare DC 8-point Output Module.

7-3
7 Maintenance
7.1.2 Built-in Fuses

3) DC 16-point Output Module

a) The fuse inside a DC 16-point Output Module is not to protect the output circuit. The
fuse prevents the Module from damage that may occur in the following cases:
• External causes: For example, when over-voltage is applied to the power termi-
nals for driving load of the DC 16-point Output Module.

• Internal causes: For example, when foreign matter such as chips are present in
the DC 16-point Output Module, and thereby short-circuiting the
internal circuits.

b) When the built-in fuses are blown out, the indicator lamp “F” of the DC 16-point Out-
put Module is lit. If the fuses are blown out, eliminate the cause and replace the
fuse.

INFO The fuses built in the DC 16-point Output Modules can be replaced by users.

4) DC 32-point Output Modules

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 32-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 32-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

a) The fuse inside a DC 32-point Output Module is not to protect the output circuit. The
fuse prevents the Module from damage that may occur in the following cases:
• External causes: For example, when over-voltage is applied to the power termi-
nals for driving load of the DC 32-point Output Module.

• Internal causes: For example, when foreign matter such as chips are present in
the DC 32-point Output Module, and thereby short-circuiting the
internal circuits.

b) When the built-in fuses are blown out, the indicator lamp “F” of the DC 32-point Out-
put Module is lit. If the fuses are blown out, eliminate the cause and replace the
Module with a spare DC 32-point Output Module.

7-4
7.1 Built-in Fuses

5) DC 64-point Output Modules

CAUTION Do not replace the built-in fuses of the DC 64-point Output Modules.

If the built-in fuses are replaced by anyone other than a Yaskawa-approved

technician, a failure or malfunction may occur in the DC 64-point Output Mod-
ules, and the guarantee is void.

a) The fuse inside a DC 64-point Output Module is not to protect the output circuit. The
fuse prevents the Module from damage that may occur in the following cases:
• External causes: For example, when over-voltage is applied to the power termi-
nals for driving load of the DC 64-point Output Module.

• Internal causes: For example, when foreign matter such as chips are present in
the DC 64-point Output Module, and thereby short-circuiting the
internal circuits.

b) When the built-in fuses are blown out, the indicator lamp “F” of the DC 64-point Out-
put Module is lit. If the fuses are blown out, eliminate the cause and replace the
Module with a spare DC 64-point Output Module.

7.1.3 Replacement of Built-in Fuses

1) I/O Modules whose Built-in Fuses can be Replaced by Users

The fuses of the following Output Modules can be replaced by users.

• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sinking output):

Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34310

• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sourcing output):

Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34320 7
2) Replacement Procedure
Use the following procedure to replace the built-in fuses of DC 16-point Modules.

(1) Turn OFF the DC power to the Module for driving loads.
(2) Remove the terminal block from the Module. For details, refer to 6.1.2 (3)
Removing the Terminal Block from the Module.
(3) Remove the Module from the Mounting Base. For details, refer to 6.1.2 (4)
Removing Modules.
(4) Remove the built-in fuse from the Module.
(5) Replace a spare fuse on the Module.
(6) Eliminate the cause of the fuse blowout and install the Module on the Mounting
Base.
(7) Install the terminal block on the Module.

7-5
7 Maintenance
7.2.1 Hot Swapping

7.2 Hot Swapping

This section describes precautions on mounting or removing 120-series I/O Modules

while the power is being supplied.

7.2.1 Hot Swapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6

7.2.1 Hot Swapping

1) Meaning of Hot Swapping

a) Mounting or removing an I/O and other Modules while the external power supply is
being supplied ON to the Power Supply Module will allow the CPU Module to con-
tinue working normally. This function is called hot swapping (removal/insertion under
power).
b) Hot swapping allows replacement of I/O Modules without stopping the operation of
CPU Module.
c) If a Module is hot swapped, it will take several scan cycles for the new Module to run
normal I/O and communications processing as follows.
(1) I/O and Special Purpose Modules
Module will start normal I/O processing several scan cycles after being
mounted to the slot.
To use hot swapping effectively, remember that some Modules cannot be mounted or
IMPORTANT
removed while power is being supplied. Also be sure to consider the impact on the
overall control system before removing a Module.

2) Modules that Support Hot Swapping

The following table shows the Modules which support hot swapping.

Table 7.2 Modules that Support Hot Swapping

Product Name Model No. Permitted/ Safety Switch

Not permitted Required
Digital 100-VAC 16-point Input JAMSC-120DAI54300 Permitted Yes
Input Module
Modules Permitted
200-VAC 16-point Input JAMSC-120DAI74300 Yes
Module
12/24-VDC 16-point Input JAMSC-120DDI34300 Permitted −
Module
12/24-VDC 32-point Input JAMSC-120DDI35400 Permitted −
Module
12/24-VDC 64-point Input JAMSC-120DDI36400 Permitted −
Module
Analog Analog Input Modules JAMSC-120AVI02000 Permitted −
Input (±10V, 4 channels)
Modules Analog Input Modules JAMSC-120AVI02100 Permitted −
(0-10 V, 4 channels)
Analog Input Modules JAMSC-120ACI02000 Permitted −
(4 to 20 mA, 4 channels)

7-6
7.2 Hot Swapping

Table 7.2 Modules that Support Hot Swapping

Product Name Model No. Permitted/ Safety Switch

Not permitted Required
Digital 100/200-VAC 8-point Output JAMSC-120DAO83000 Permitted Yes
Output Module
Modules Permitted
100/200-VAC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DAO84300 Yes
Module
12/24-VDC 8-point Output JAMSC-120DDO33000 Permitted −
Module
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34310 Permitted −
Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 16-point Output JAMSC-120DDO34320 Permitted −
Module (sourcing)
12/24-VDC 32-point Output JAMSC-120DDO35410 Permitted −
Module (sinking)
12/24-VDC 64-point Output JAMSC-120DDO36410 Permitted −
Module (sinking)
Relay Contact 16-point JAMSC-120DRA84300 Permitted AC loads: Yes
Output Module DC loads: NO
Analog Analog Output Modules JAMSC-120AVO01000 Permitted −
Output (±10 V, 2 channels)
Modules Permitted −
Analog Output Modules JAMSC-120AVO01100
(0-10 V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Modules JAMSC-120AVO01200 Permitted −
(0-5 V, 2 channels)
Analog Output Modules JAMSC-120ACO01000 Permitted −
(4 to 20 mA, 2 channels)
Special Register Input Module JAMSC-120RDI34410 Permitted −
Purpose Permitted −
Register Output Module JAMSC-120RDO34410
Modules

3) Precautions When Hot Swapping

7
Heed the following precautions when hot swapping (removal/insertion under
power).

Inserting or removing an AC I/O Module while AC power is being supplied may

result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

CAUTION When using a single-phase AC power supply (100/200 VAC) for driving the loads of
the Relay Contact Output Module, install a safety switch for each Module. Before
inserting or removing the Relay Contact Output Module, always turn this safety switch
OFF to turn OFF the AC power supply to the Module.

Inserting or removing a Relay Contact Output Module while AC power is being

supplied may result in an electric shock at touching the power supply terminals.

7-7
7 Maintenance
7.2.1 Hot Swapping

Note: (1) Do not hot swap more than one Module at a time, even if the Modules all sup-
port hot swapping. Hot swapping more than one Module at the same time may
cause the CPU to reset or to stop completely.
(2) When hot swapping on an I/O Module which supply DC power as the I/O power
supply, there is no need to setup safety switches. However, it may cause I/O
signal chatter when inserting or removing a terminal block or a connector to or
from the Module. If this is a problem, then setup a chatter prevention switch for
each Module and be sure to turn this switch OFF to turn OFF the DC power
supply.
(3) When hot swapping, never short-circuit the terminal block or the connectors of
the Module.
(4) Inserting or removing a Module which does not permit hot swapping may cause
the CPU Module to stop.

7-8
EN Standard Low voltage Directive
Compliant I/O Modules

8
This chapter describes the specifications of I/O Modules that conform to
EN Standards (Low voltage Directive).

8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

8.1.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.1.2 External Appearances - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
8.1.3 EN Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7

8-1
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules

8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

This section describes the I/O Modules that conform to Low Voltage Directive.

8.1.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

8.1.2 External Appearances - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
8.1.3 EN Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7

8.1.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules

The following I/O Modules conform to the Low Voltage Directive.

Table 8.1 Low Voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules

Product Name Model Name Model No. Features

Digital Input 100 to 120-VAC AC100IN-16P JAMSC-120DAI54309 1) Used to input digital signals.
Modules 16-point Input 2) 100 to 120 VAC, 16 points,
Module 7mA (50Hz)
200 to 240-VAC AC200IN-16P JAMSC-120DAI74309 1) Used to input digital signals.
16-point Input 2) 200 to 240 VAC, 16 points,
Module 7mA (50Hz)
Digital 100 to 120-VAC ACOUT-8P JAMSC-120DAO83009 1) Used to output digital signals.
Output or 200 to 240- 2) 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240
Modules VAC 8-point VAC, 8 points, 1.0 A/point
Output Module
100 to 120-VAC ACOUT-16P JAMSC-120DAO84309 1) Used to output digital signals.
or 200 to 240- 2) 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240
VAC 16-point VAC, 16 points, 0.3 A/point
Output Module
Relay Contact RELAY-16P JAMSC-120DRA84309 1) Used to output digital signals.
16-point Output 2) Relay contacts, 16 points, 1.0
Module A/point

For the details of I/O Modules, refer to Chapter 2 Digital I/O Module.

8-2
8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

8.1.2 External Appearances

1) AC Input Module
100-to 120-VAC 16-point Input Module (JAMSC-120DAI54309)
200-to 240-VAC 16-point Input Module (JAMSC-120DAI74309)

Module description (120DAI54309)

Removable terminal
block for field
connections Hinged
(compliant with Low terminal
Voltage Directive) cover
Color code (pink)
Signal label inserts

LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
Field wiring terminals (black) (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DAO 843 09 LED Color Indication when ON
8
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Always not lit
2 10 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the input
3 11
4 12
signal is ON.
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

Note: The affixed model descriptions are as follows:

Model No. Module Description

JAMSC-120DAI54309 120DAI54309
JAMSC-120DAI74309 120DAI74309

8-3
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.2 External Appearances

2) AC Output Module
100-to 120-VAC or 200-to 240-VAC 16-point Output Module
(JAMSC-120DAO84409)
100-to 120-VAC or 200-to 240-VAC 8-point Output Module
(JAMSC-120DAO83009)
Relay Contact 16-point Output Module (JAMSC-120DRA84309)

Module description (120DAO84309)

Removable terminal
block for field
connections Hinged
(compliant with Low terminal
Voltage Directive) cover
Color code (red)
Signal label inserts

LED area

Module mounting screw

(Use a M4 Phillips screwdriver.) Terminal block mounting screw
Field wiring terminals (black) (Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)
(Use a M3 Phillips screwdriver.)

LED Area
120 DAO 843 09 LED Color Indication when ON
ACTIVE Green Processing I/O
ACTIVE F
1 9 F Red Fuse blown-out, or external power supply dis-
2 10 connected
3 11
4 12 1 to 16 Green The corresponding LED is lit when the output
5 13 signal is ON.
6 14
7 15
8 16

Note: The affixed model descriptions are as follows. The LED indicator “F” is pro-
vided only for the model JAMSC-120DAO84309.

Model No. Module Description “F” fulse LED

JAMSC-120DAO84309 120DAO84309 Required
JAMSC-120DAO84009 120DAO84009 Not required
JAMSC-120DRA84309 120DRA84309 Not required

8-4
8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

8.1.3 EN Standards

The I/O Modules complies with the following EN Standards.

However, reconfirmation is required after being installed in the final product because
these products are built-in type devices.

• EN61131-1

• EN61131-2

1) Differences from Standard Modules

The I/O Modules differ from the standard Modules in the following items.

• Removable terminal block

2) Conditions Low Voltage Directive

The following conditions must be satisfied to conform to the Low Voltage Directive.

a) Terminal block
• Use terminal blocks that are certified as the Low Voltage Directive compliant
products.

• The terminal blocks of the I/O Modules complies with the Low Voltage Directive.
To identify these terminal blocks, the shape of the field wiring terminals and the
color of the terminal block mounting screws are different from standard terminal
blocks as shown in the following table.

Specifications Standard Terminal Block EN Standard Compliant

Terminal Block
Shape of field wiring With square washers With round washers
terminals
Color of screws Silver (nickel plated) Black
Note: For the field wiring terminals, make sure to use the terminal block provided
with the product.
If other terminal blocks are used, the product does not comply with the Low
Voltage Directive. 8
Low Voltage Directive
TERMS
One of the requirements under the European Electrical Safety Regulations.
It applies to the electrical equipment designed to operate in the voltage range 50 VAC
to 1000 VAC or 75 VDC to 1500 VDC.

8-5
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.3 EN Standards

b) Connecting to Field Wiring Terminals

Make sure to use M3 crimp terminals (round shape) that are appropriate for the size
of the wire. Put installation covers at each crimp when connecting to the field wiring
terminals as shown in the following figure.
Make sure that the minimum clearance for air circulation is provided on both sides of
each crimp terminal by checking that the terminals are parallel to the barriers
between the terminals.

Crimp terminal

Insulation cover

Barrier
Parallel to
barriers

Round-shape Crimp Terminal Terminal Block

CAUTION When connecting to field wiring terminals, always use round shape crimp terminals for
M3 screws and mount insulation cover at each crimp.

If bare wire are used, an electric shock or a short-circuit if the wires become
loose.

c) Protective Fuses
When the output modules are used, install fuses to the circuit to protect the output
circuit. Use a fuse with a current rating of 2A or less, which meets the specifications
described in IEC 1272 Sheet 2.

Recommended fuse: 217000 Series (manufactured by Littelfuse Inc.)

8-6
8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules

This section describes the specifications of Low Voltage Directive compliant I/O Mod-
ules.

1) 100- to120-VAC 16-point Input Modules

Table 8.2 Specifications of 100- to120-VAC 16-point Input Modules

Item Specifications
Name 100- to 120-VAC 16-point Input Module
Model Name AC100IN-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAI54309 (EN standard)
Rated Voltage 100 to 120 VAC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 132 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Inrush Current 160 mA
Rated Current 7 mA (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz)
Input Impedance 14.3 kΩ (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz)
12.5 kΩ (at 100 VAC, 60 Hz)
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 74 to 132 VAC
OFF voltage range: 30 VAC max.
Input Type AC type 2 (according to IEC 1131-2)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 20 ms max.
ON to OFF: 35 ms max.
Number of Commons 2
Number of Inputs per Common 8 points/common
Input Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and
common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals.
Number of Inputs 16
8
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lit during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min. or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input terminals
and internal circuits and between all input commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input ter-
minals and ground (measure by a 500-VDC test voltage megohm-
meter)
External Power Supply 100 to 120 VAC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Maximum Heating Value 2.0 W
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

8-7
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules

2) 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Input Modules

Table 8.3 Specifications of 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Input Modules

Item Specifications
Name 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Input Module
Model Name AC200IN-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAI74309 (EN standard)
Rated Voltage 200 to 240 VAC
Maximum Allowable Voltage 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Inrush Current 320 mA
Rated Current 7 mA (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz)
Input Impedance 28.6 kΩ (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz)
23.1 kΩ (at 200 VAC, 60 Hz)
Standard Operating Ranges ON voltage range: 159 to 264 VAC
OFF voltage range: 40 VAC max.
Input Type AC type 2 (according to IEC 1131-2)
Input Delay Times OFF to ON: 20 ms max.
ON to OFF: 35 ms max.
Number of Commons 2
Number of Inputs per Common 8 points/common
Input Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and
common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals.
Number of Inputs 16
Input Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the input is ON.
Status saved in internal logic
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lit during input processing
Insulation Method Photocoupler
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min. or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between input terminals
and internal circuits and between all input commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between input ter-
minals and ground (measure by a 500-VDC test voltage megohm-
meter)
External Power Supply 200 to 240 VAC supplied to signals
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 90 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Hot Swapping (Removal/insertion Permitted
under power)
Maximum Heating Value 3.5 W
Approximate Mass 250 g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

8-8
8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

3) 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Output Modules

Table 8.4 Specifications of 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Output Modules

Item Specifications
Name 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 16-point Output Module
Model Name ACOUT-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84309 (EN standard)
Rated Voltage 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC
Allowable Voltage Range 80 to 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum Load Current 0.6 A rms/point, 2.4 A/common
Output Voltage Drop 1.0 V rms
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 5ms max.
ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 5 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 3 mA max. at 240 VAC, 50 Hz
Minimum Load Current 7 mA rms
Output Type Triac outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
Output Power Supply per Common Connect power supplies of the same phases to the common 1 and
common 2.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals.
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to IEC 1131-2)
Built-in Fuse Two (one per common) 5A-fuses
(Burnout time: 2 min max. at 200% of rated current)
Surge Suppressor Varistor
Other Output Protections None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic 8
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lit during output processing
F : Lit when a fuse is blown out or the output power supply is discon-
nected.
Insulation Method Phototriac
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min. or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output terminals
and internal circuits and between all output commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between output ter-
minals and ground (measure by a 500-VDC test voltage megohm-
meter)
External Power Supply 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 300 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Maximum Heating Value 5.5W
Approximate Mass 300g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

8-9
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules

4) 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 8-point Output Modules

Table 8.5 Specifications of 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 8-point Output Modules

Item Specifications
Name 100- to 120-VAC or 200- to 240-VAC 8-point Output Module
Model Name ACOUT-8P
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO83009 (EN standard)
Rated Voltage 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC
Allowable Voltage Range 80 to 264 VAC
Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable Frequency Range 47 to 63 Hz
Maximum Load Current 1.0 A rms/point
Output Voltage Drop 1.0 V rms
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 5ms max.
ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 5 ms max.
OFF Leakage Current 3 mA max. at 240 VAC, 50 Hz
Minimum Load Current 10 mA rms
Output Type Triac outputs
Number of Commons 8 (Each output circuit is independent.)
Output Power Supply per Common Different phase power supplies can be connected to the commons.
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals.
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to IEC 1131-2)
Built-in Fuse None
Surge Suppressor Varistor
Other Output Protections None
Number of Outputs 8
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lit during output processing
Insulation Method Phototriac
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min. or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output terminals
and internal circuits and between all output circuits.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between output ter-
minals and ground (measure by a 500-VDC test voltage megohm-
meter)
External Power Supply 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC to drive loads
Derating Conditions None
Internal Current Consumption 150 mA max. at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Maximum Heating Value 9.0W
Approximate Mass 300g
External Dimensions 40.3×130×103.9 mm (W×H×D)

8-10
8.1 EN Standard Compliant I/O Modules

5) Relay Contact 16-point Output Modules

Table 8.6 Specifications of Relay Contact 16-point Output Modules

Item Specification
Name Relay Contact 16-point Output Module
Model Name RELAY-16P
Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84309 (EN standard)
Rated Voltage/Current 240 VAC, 1 A, resistive load
24 VDC, 1 A, resistive load
Maximum Load Power 750 VA (AC loads)
90 W (DC loads)
Maximum Load Voltage 264 VAC/125 VDC
Contact Specifications

Minimum Load Voltage/Current 100 mVDC, 0.1 mA

Contact Resistance 100 mΩ max.
Contact Electrical 3 A at 30 VDC, resistive load:100,000 operations min.
Life 1 A at 30 VDC, resistive load: 300,000 operations min.
τ = 7 ms: 150,000 operations min.
τ = 40 ms: 40,000 operations min.
1 A at 120 VAC, cosφ = 1.0: 400,000 operations min.
cosφ = 0.4: 250,000 operations min.
1 A at 240 VAC, cosφ = 1.0: 300,000 operations min.
cosφ = 0.4: 200,000 operations min.
Mechanical 20 million operations min.
Output Delay Times OFF to ON: 10 ms max.
ON to OFF: 15 ms max.
Output Type Relay contact outputs
Number of Commons 2
Number of Outputs per Common 8 points/common
Output Power Supply per Common a) When using an AC power supply (100 to 120 VAC or 200 to
240 VAC), connect Power supplies with the same phase to
the common 1 and common 2.
b) Do not connect AC power supply and DC power supply to
one common. 8
External Connections Removable terminal block with M3 screw terminals
Output Protection Type Unprotected outputs (according to IEC1131-2)
Builtñin Fuse None
Surge Suppressor None
Other Output Protection None
Number of Outputs 16
Output Signal Indication Indicator for each point; lit when the output is ON.
Status saved in internal logic.
Status Indication ACTIVE: Lit during output processing
Insulation Method Relay
Dielectric Strength 1,500 VAC for 1 min or 1,800 VAC for 1 s between output termi-
nals and internal circuits and between all output commons
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. at room temperature and humidity between out-
put terminals and ground (measured by a 500-VDC test voltage
megohmmter)
External Power Supply 100 to 120-VAC or 200 to 240-VAC or 24 VDC supplied to drive
loads
Derating Conditions None

8-11
8 EN Standard Low voltage Directive Compliant I/O Modules
8.1.4 Specifications of the I/O Modules

Table 8.6 Specifications of Relay Contact 16-point Output Modules

Item Specification
Internal Current Consumption 610 mA at 5 VDC (with all points ON)
Hot Swapping Permitted
(Removal/insertion under power)
Maximum Heating Value 3.1 W
Approximate Mass 300 g
External Dimensions 40.3 × 130 × 103.9 mm (W × H × D)

8-12
Appendix A
A

External Dimensions
A.1 I/O Module Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-2
A.2 I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-3
A.3 DC 32-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-3
A.4 DC 64-point I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-4
A.5 Register I/O Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-4

A-1
Appendix External Dimensions

A.1 I/O Module Types

Approx. External
Mass (g) Connection
1) Digital Input Modules
• 100-VAC 16-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAI54300 250 Terminal block
• 200-VAC 16-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DAI74300 250 Terminal block
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI34300 250 Terminal block
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400 250 Connector
• 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400 300 Connector

2) Analog input Modules

• Analog Input Module (±10V, 4 channels): 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120AVI02000
• Analog Input Module (0 to 10V, 4 channels): 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120AVI02100
• Analog Input Module (4 to 20mA, 4 channels): 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120ACI02000

3) Digital Output Modules

• 100/200-VAC 8-point Output Module: 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO83000
• 100/200-VAC 16-point Output Module: 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DAO84300
• 12/24-VDC 8-point Output Module: 250 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO33000
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sinking): 250 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34310
• 12/24-VDC 16-point Output Module (sourcing): 250 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO34320
• 12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module (sinking): 250 Connector
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410
• 12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module (sinking): 300 Connector
Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410
• Relay Contact 16-point Output Module: 300 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120DRA84300

4) Analog Output Modules

• Analog Output Module (±10V, 2 channels): 350 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120AVO01000
• Analog Output Module (0 to 10V, 2 channels): 350 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120AVO01100
• Analog Output Module (0 to 5V, 2 channels): 350 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120AVO01200
• Analog Output Module (4 to 20mA, 2 channels): 350 Terminal block
Model No. JAMSC-120ACO01000

A-2
A.2 I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

A.2 I/O Modules with Terminal Blocks

Unit: mm Module mounting
screw M4

40.3

130
Nameplate

Terminal block 103.9 (4.8)

(See note.)

Note Terminal block comes as accessory.

A.3 DC 32-point I/O Modules

1) 12/24-VDC 32-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI35400
12/24-VDC 32-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDO35410

Unit: mm Module mounting

screw M4

40.3

Nameplate
130

103.9 (4.8)

A-3
Appendix External Dimensions

A.4 DC 64-point I/O Modules

1) 12/24-VDC 64-point Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDI36400
12/24-VDC 64-point Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120DDO36410
Unit: mm Module mounting
Mass: approx. 300 g screw M4

40.3
See note.

Nameplate
130

(40) (47.2) 103.9 (4.8)

Note Connector and cover come as accessory.

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (Fujitsu)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (Fujitsu)

A.5 Register I/O Modules

1) Register Input Module: Model No. JAMSC-120RDI34410
Register Output Module: Model No. JAMSC-120RDO34410

Unit: mm
Mass: Approx. 300 g

M4 Module
mounting screw

Connector
(See note.)

Nameplate
130

40.3 (47.2) 103.9 (4.8)

Note Connector and cover come as accessory.

Connector: FCN-361J040-AU (Fujitsu)
Cover: FCN-360C040-B (Fujitsu)

A-4
Index

Index performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12/24-VDC 8-point output module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3-49
3-52
3-32
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
Numerics fuse- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
100/200-VAC 16-point output module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31 16-point input module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
bit order- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-82
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29, 3-30
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-82
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-82
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-30
input data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
100/200-VAC 8-point output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-82, 3-83
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-25
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24 MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-82, 3-83
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26 service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
100-VAC 16-point input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2 16-point output module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3 bit order- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5 I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2 I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4 LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95, 3-96
12/24-VDC 16-point input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10 module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11 MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-95, 3-96
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 output data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10 service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12 timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
12/24-VDC 16-point output module (sinking) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 timeout output data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37 200-VAC 16-point input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39 circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38 external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
spare parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39 terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38 32-point I/O connector terminal block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
12/24-VDC 16-point output module (sourcing)- - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40 32-point I/O module cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41 32-point input module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43 bit order- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-85
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42 I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-85
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40 I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-85
spare parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43 input data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42 LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-85, 3-86
12/24VDC 32-point input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-85, 3-86
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
external connection cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
32-point output module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
bit order- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
12/24-VDC 32-point output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98, 3-99
external connection cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45, 3-46 MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98, 3-99
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44 output data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-100
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-46 service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-100
12/24-VDC 64-point input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18 timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-100
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19 timeout output data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-100
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23 64-point I/O module cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-61
64-point input module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87
external connection cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-22, 3-53
bit order- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-89
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-89
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-88
12/24-VDC 64-point output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
input data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-91
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50
LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-89
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
module type setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-88
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50, 3-52
MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-89

Index-1
Index

service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-91 analog output module I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39

64-point output module allocation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-40
bit order - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-102 I/O reference- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-102 mode setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-40
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39
LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-102 service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-40
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 timeout output- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-40
MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-102 timeout output data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-40
output data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-104 analog output modules (±10 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-104 circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-22
timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-105 external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
timeout output data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-105 I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
8-point output module allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92 output characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
bit order - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93 performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93 terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92 analog output modules (0 to 10 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
LSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93 circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-27
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92 external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29
MSB setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-93 I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29, 4-39
service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94 output characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26
timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94 performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
timeout output data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94 terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-28
analog output modules (0 to 5 V, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
A
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-27
ambient operating humidity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29
ambient operating temperature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29, 4-39
ambient storage humidity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
output characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26
ambient storage temperature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
analog I/O allocations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-43
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-28
I/O references - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-46
analog output modules (4 to 20-mA, 2 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30
mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-47
circuit configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-32
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-44
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-47
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
software filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-48
output characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-31
timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-49
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30
timeout output data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-50
terminal connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-33
analog input module (0 to 10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10 B
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 built-in fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
input characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
terminal connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11 C
analog input module I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35 configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
I/O data format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-36 connecting I/O modules
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35 AC input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
input signal status- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-37 AC output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
mode setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-36 DC input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
module type setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35 DC output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-37 connections between I/O modules
software filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-36 connections between AC I/O modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-49
analog input modules (±10 V, 4 channels) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 connections between DC I/O modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 cooling method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7 corrosive gas- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
input characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 D
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 digital I/O allocation
terminal connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 bit order - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-114
analog input modules (4 to 20-mA, 4 channels)- - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14 data type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-113
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 I/O references - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-111
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19 module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-110
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18 service scan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-115
input characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15 timeout output- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-116
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14 timeout output data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-117
terminal connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

Index-2
Index

E EN standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
external appearances - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
electrical operating conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7
environmental conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
external dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
external power supplies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52 M
external wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
mass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
G mechanical operating conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
model name
general specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
A/D 0-10 V 4CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
ground - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
A/D-CUR-4CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28
A/D-VOL-4CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
grounding the analog I/O modules
AC100IN-16P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
grounding the analog input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28
AC200IN-16P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
grounding the analog input signal cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29
ACOUT-16P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
grounding the analog output signal cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29
ACOUT-8P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
grounding the control panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-30
D/A 0-10 V 2CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
H D/A 0-5 V 2CH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
hot swapping- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6 D/A-CUR-2CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30
D/A-VOL-2CH- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
I DC24IN-16P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10 DC24IN-32P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
16-point input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-81 DC24IN-64P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18
16-point output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-94 DC24OUT-16PSN- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
32-point input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-84 DC24OUT-16PSR- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
32-point output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-97 DC24OUT-32P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
64-point input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-87 DC24OUT-64PSN- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
64-point output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 DC24OUT-8P- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
8-point output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92 RELAY-16P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
analog input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35 W0300 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
analog output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-39 W0301 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
register input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10 W0302 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
register output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13 W5410 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74
installation requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 module installation location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
installing modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
installing the module on the mounting base - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4, 6-10
N
noise resistance- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
J
JAMSC-120ACI02000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
O
JAMSC-120ACO01000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30 operating altitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
JAMSC-120AVI02000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 P
JAMSC-120AVI02100 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
panel wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
JAMSC-120AVO01000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28
JAMSC-120AVO01100 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
separation of power supply systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
JAMSC-120AVO01200 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
wiring AC I/O modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14
JAMSC-120DAI54300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
wiring DC I/O modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
JAMSC-120DAI74300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
pollution level- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
JAMSC-120DAO83000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
precaution on wiring AC input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
JAMSC-120DAO84300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
connecting inductive loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
JAMSC-120DDI34300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
leakage current from input devices- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-34
JAMSC-120DDI35400 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
long wiring runs from input devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-33
JAMSC-120DDI36400 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-18
power supply phasing for input signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
JAMSC-120DDO33000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
precaution on wiring AC output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
JAMSC-120DDO34310 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
connecting contacts to an inductive load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-36
JAMSC-120DDO34320 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
connecting solenoids with diodes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-39
JAMSC-120DDO35410 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
leakage current from output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-38
JAMSC-120DDO36410 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
maximum load current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-37
JAMSC-120DRA84300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
minimum switching voltage/current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-38
JEPMC-W5410 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74
power supply phasing for output signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
JZMSZ-120W0300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
protective fuses- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-36
JZMSZ-120W0301 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
precaution on wiring analog input module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
JZMSZ-120W0302 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65
analog input signal wires - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
L grounding shielded cables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
low voltage directive compliant I/O modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 input circuit insulation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
precaution on wiring analog output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51

Index-3
Index

analog output signal wires - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51 W5410 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-74

grounding shielded cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
maximum load current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
X
maximum load resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51 XW2B-40F5-P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-71
precaution on wiring DC input module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
connecting inductive loads- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
connecting with different voltage ratings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-43
leakage current from input devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-41
precaution on wiring DC output module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
connecting inductive loads- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-46
loads with large inrush current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-48
maximum load current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-47, 6-48
protective fuses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
precaution on wiring external power supplies
external power supplies- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52
precautions on wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
AC input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32
AC output modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-35
analog input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
analog output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-51
connections between AC I/O modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-49
connections between DC I/O modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-50
DC input modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
DC output modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-45
external power supplies- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-52

R
register I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20
cycle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
I/O reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
module type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-20
select timings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28
service scan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
timeout output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25
register input modules- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
external connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
register output modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
external connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
I/O allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
relay contact 16-point output module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
circuit configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56
external appearance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
fuse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-57, 3-58
performance specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
terminal connections with AC loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-57
terminal connections with DC loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-58

S
shock resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

V
vibration shock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

W
W0300 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
W0301 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-68
W0302 cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-65

Index-4
MEMOCON GL120, GL130
120-SERIES I/O MODULES
USER'S MANUAL

IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)

480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5151 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
Avenida Piraporinha 777, Diadema, São Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-3585-1187
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH
Hauptstraβe 185, Eschborn 65760, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg. 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.
12F, Carlton Bld., No.21 HuangHe Road, HuangPu District, Shanghai 200003, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei 104, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 1995-2013 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

MANUAL NO. SIE-C825-20.22C

Published in Japan September 2013 95-11 12 -0
13-6-9

ST1927 SP41 High-Voltage Battery
50% (2)
ST1927 SP41 High-Voltage Battery
33 pages
Instruction Manual: QS Series Stepper Motor Driver QS-10N QS-10P QS-10H
100% (1)
Instruction Manual: QS Series Stepper Motor Driver QS-10N QS-10P QS-10H
10 pages
Power System Control and Stability 3rd Edition by Paul M. Anderson
100% (3)
Power System Control and Stability 3rd Edition by Paul M. Anderson
113 pages
CC 220n Rack Bosch Manual
No ratings yet
CC 220n Rack Bosch Manual
194 pages
UPS 90net - 60 - 800KVA
No ratings yet
UPS 90net - 60 - 800KVA
42 pages
YUTONG ZK6140BD Airport Bus Specification
No ratings yet
YUTONG ZK6140BD Airport Bus Specification
4 pages
ENODE Distributed IO Controller Operations Manual 1000003483 RevR
100% (1)
ENODE Distributed IO Controller Operations Manual 1000003483 RevR
83 pages
2017 Federal Hydropower Replacements Book BW 1.1
No ratings yet
2017 Federal Hydropower Replacements Book BW 1.1
280 pages
Solucionario Cap 2 Máquinas Eléctricas
100% (1)
Solucionario Cap 2 Máquinas Eléctricas
48 pages
Indian Railway LHB Coach Diagram Net1 and Net2
81% (59)
Indian Railway LHB Coach Diagram Net1 and Net2
1 page
GLOFA GM6 Series: User's Manual
No ratings yet
GLOFA GM6 Series: User's Manual
190 pages
Automation & Controls Full Catalog PDF
No ratings yet
Automation & Controls Full Catalog PDF
528 pages
GE-Control Systems Solutions Catalog
No ratings yet
GE-Control Systems Solutions Catalog
482 pages
Control Systems GE
No ratings yet
Control Systems GE
482 pages
Yaskawa Memocon 120-130
No ratings yet
Yaskawa Memocon 120-130
495 pages
984 Systemmanual
No ratings yet
984 Systemmanual
328 pages
984 Systemmanual
No ratings yet
984 Systemmanual
328 pages
EPM-Sxxx - I-O System 1000 - v7-1 - EN
No ratings yet
EPM-Sxxx - I-O System 1000 - v7-1 - EN
744 pages
Drt1-Com Gt1 Series Devicenet Multiple Io Terminal Operation Manual
No ratings yet
Drt1-Com Gt1 Series Devicenet Multiple Io Terminal Operation Manual
233 pages
EPM-Sxxx I-O System 1000 System Manual en
No ratings yet
EPM-Sxxx I-O System 1000 System Manual en
1,116 pages
EPM-Sxxx I-O System 1000 System Manual v8-0 en
No ratings yet
EPM-Sxxx I-O System 1000 System Manual v8-0 en
794 pages
1794-FLEX IO High-Density Analog Modules
No ratings yet
1794-FLEX IO High-Density Analog Modules
90 pages
Progamming Manual Q & A Series
No ratings yet
Progamming Manual Q & A Series
1,466 pages
Modulos Analogos
No ratings yet
Modulos Analogos
168 pages
STNRG 388 A
No ratings yet
STNRG 388 A
122 pages
HBT Bms VisualLogic Controllers Installationand Manual
No ratings yet
HBT Bms VisualLogic Controllers Installationand Manual
72 pages
Operation Manual: Devicenet Multiple I/O Terminal
No ratings yet
Operation Manual: Devicenet Multiple I/O Terminal
233 pages
Compact 5000 I/O Analog Modules: User Manual
No ratings yet
Compact 5000 I/O Analog Modules: User Manual
158 pages
SIEZ-C887-5.2_03-0
No ratings yet
SIEZ-C887-5.2_03-0
95 pages
SX 52 BD
No ratings yet
SX 52 BD
58 pages
W371-E1-03 (1)
No ratings yet
W371-E1-03 (1)
209 pages
1756-um058_-en-p_ControlLogix Digital IO Modules User Manual
No ratings yet
1756-um058_-en-p_ControlLogix Digital IO Modules User Manual
186 pages
1734 Point I O PDF
No ratings yet
1734 Point I O PDF
72 pages
Controllogix Digital I/O Modules: User Manual
No ratings yet
Controllogix Digital I/O Modules: User Manual
182 pages
Metronik Ge Automation and Controls Versa Max Micro and Nano Controllers Katalog
No ratings yet
Metronik Ge Automation and Controls Versa Max Micro and Nano Controllers Katalog
106 pages
CPLD User Guide From Xilinx
No ratings yet
CPLD User Guide From Xilinx
24 pages
Data Sheet
No ratings yet
Data Sheet
24 pages
TWIDO Hardware Reference Guide V2.5
No ratings yet
TWIDO Hardware Reference Guide V2.5
246 pages
Tec Cs1w Cj1w SCB Scu Operation
No ratings yet
Tec Cs1w Cj1w SCB Scu Operation
538 pages
Fp2 Fp2sh Usersmanual Arct1f320e10
No ratings yet
Fp2 Fp2sh Usersmanual Arct1f320e10
384 pages
Zilog-Z8F6423FT020SG-datasheet
No ratings yet
Zilog-Z8F6423FT020SG-datasheet
297 pages
CL200 PLC
No ratings yet
CL200 PLC
158 pages
aquila_carrier_board_design_guide
No ratings yet
aquila_carrier_board_design_guide
44 pages
Q L Series Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Q L Series Programming Manual
1,646 pages
PLC Yasakawa
No ratings yet
PLC Yasakawa
522 pages
Mitsubishi Melsec Fx0s Fx0n Fx2n Series PLC Technical Catalogue
50% (2)
Mitsubishi Melsec Fx0s Fx0n Fx2n Series PLC Technical Catalogue
84 pages
S800 CI801MemMap
No ratings yet
S800 CI801MemMap
222 pages
POINT I/O Modules: Bulletin 1734 Selection Guide
No ratings yet
POINT I/O Modules: Bulletin 1734 Selection Guide
72 pages
Lecture: PLC Hardware: Programmable Controllers
No ratings yet
Lecture: PLC Hardware: Programmable Controllers
18 pages
Description of Options: MIC-2 MKII I/O Module User's Manual
No ratings yet
Description of Options: MIC-2 MKII I/O Module User's Manual
24 pages
XC2785X PDF
No ratings yet
XC2785X PDF
136 pages
W345 E1 11+CS CJ Series+OperManual
No ratings yet
W345 E1 11+CS CJ Series+OperManual
511 pages
9MA10036 FREE Smart Installation Manual 1111 en Web
No ratings yet
9MA10036 FREE Smart Installation Manual 1111 en Web
58 pages
Modicon Programming Guide
0% (1)
Modicon Programming Guide
18 pages
SH 080785 Engm
No ratings yet
SH 080785 Engm
316 pages
5 I 25 Man
No ratings yet
5 I 25 Man
23 pages
W336 E1 10+CS CJ Series+OperManual
No ratings yet
W336 E1 10+CS CJ Series+OperManual
829 pages
1734-SG001D-EN-P - September 2010
No ratings yet
1734-SG001D-EN-P - September 2010
68 pages
AD001, DA001 Analog IO Units Operation Guide
No ratings yet
AD001, DA001 Analog IO Units Operation Guide
61 pages
Allen Bradley 1771-IFE AI Card PDF
No ratings yet
Allen Bradley 1771-IFE AI Card PDF
63 pages
Allen Bradely Analogue Input1771-Um665 - En-P PDF
No ratings yet
Allen Bradely Analogue Input1771-Um665 - En-P PDF
63 pages
W302-E1-15
No ratings yet
W302-E1-15
272 pages
ManualOperacion SerialCommunicationsUnits PDF
No ratings yet
ManualOperacion SerialCommunicationsUnits PDF
739 pages
ISA Certified Automation Professional (CAP) Associate Study Notes: 500 Study Notes for Accelerated Certification Success
From Everand
ISA Certified Automation Professional (CAP) Associate Study Notes: 500 Study Notes for Accelerated Certification Success
Steve Brown
No ratings yet
ISA/IEC 62443 Cybersecurity Risk Assessment Specialist Study Notes
From Everand
ISA/IEC 62443 Cybersecurity Risk Assessment Specialist Study Notes
Steve Brown
No ratings yet
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
From Everand
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
Unique Content
No ratings yet
ISA/IEC 61511 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Fundamentals - Study Notes
From Everand
ISA/IEC 61511 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Fundamentals - Study Notes
Steve Brown
No ratings yet
FortiGate 7.4 Admin Study Notes: 499 Study Notes for Accelerated Certification Success
From Everand
FortiGate 7.4 Admin Study Notes: 499 Study Notes for Accelerated Certification Success
Steve Brown
No ratings yet
Yaskawa 2000 Series
No ratings yet
Yaskawa 2000 Series
69 pages
PRD Doc Pro 530001-00001 Sen Ain V2
No ratings yet
PRD Doc Pro 530001-00001 Sen Ain V2
1 page
4 ERC Clip
No ratings yet
4 ERC Clip
1 page
Catalogue Orange-Book ENGB 112021 Low
No ratings yet
Catalogue Orange-Book ENGB 112021 Low
84 pages
Repair Manual HS 1.5 Thru HS 015
No ratings yet
Repair Manual HS 1.5 Thru HS 015
12 pages
HS Catalog
No ratings yet
HS Catalog
8 pages
r201707211421192042397
No ratings yet
r201707211421192042397
2 pages
Full Wave Rectifier
No ratings yet
Full Wave Rectifier
15 pages
Handson Technology: MB102 Breadboard 3.3V/5V Power Supply
No ratings yet
Handson Technology: MB102 Breadboard 3.3V/5V Power Supply
3 pages
Simulation Study of Conventional Control Versus MTPA-Based For PMSM Control
No ratings yet
Simulation Study of Conventional Control Versus MTPA-Based For PMSM Control
4 pages
Sofar 2K21
No ratings yet
Sofar 2K21
29 pages
Check For Diagnostic Codesa. Establish Result: A - 3 Diagnostic Code Is
No ratings yet
Check For Diagnostic Codesa. Establish Result: A - 3 Diagnostic Code Is
4 pages
Lc1f2254 Datasheet WW En-Ww
No ratings yet
Lc1f2254 Datasheet WW En-Ww
3 pages
DS-PR1590_91-e
No ratings yet
DS-PR1590_91-e
4 pages
Contactors Schaltbau
No ratings yet
Contactors Schaltbau
16 pages
8-Star Connection PDF
No ratings yet
8-Star Connection PDF
3 pages
367 PDF
No ratings yet
367 PDF
342 pages
Power Integrated Module Solutions
100% (1)
Power Integrated Module Solutions
8 pages
Sunsoko All in One
No ratings yet
Sunsoko All in One
6 pages
3411 Afd
No ratings yet
3411 Afd
22 pages
Flyback Converter Design
No ratings yet
Flyback Converter Design
7 pages
NKN E-2X (ST) Y
No ratings yet
NKN E-2X (ST) Y
3 pages
Fault Level March2012 PDF
No ratings yet
Fault Level March2012 PDF
51 pages
B1+ Alphabetical Wordlist Unit 4 PDF
No ratings yet
B1+ Alphabetical Wordlist Unit 4 PDF
8 pages
Transformer and DG Set Selection
100% (6)
Transformer and DG Set Selection
3 pages
Usb Reference Design Board: Topswitch-Ii
No ratings yet
Usb Reference Design Board: Topswitch-Ii
12 pages
182590-615ASTRO-N7 CHSM72NDGF-BH 2382x1134x30 EN 20230802
No ratings yet
182590-615ASTRO-N7 CHSM72NDGF-BH 2382x1134x30 EN 20230802
2 pages
Proyecto en TomalaNew - VC0-Report
No ratings yet
Proyecto en TomalaNew - VC0-Report
11 pages
C-KOD PSS Summary report-132KV-MP-2020-21
No ratings yet
C-KOD PSS Summary report-132KV-MP-2020-21
3 pages